Nokia Solutions and Networks T6BN1 CDMA Base Station User Manual IHET6BN1 Part 3 of 3

Nokia Solutions and Networks CDMA Base Station IHET6BN1 Part 3 of 3

IHET6BN1 User Manual Part 3 of 3

Download: Nokia Solutions and Networks T6BN1 CDMA Base Station User Manual IHET6BN1 Part 3 of 3
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]Nokia Solutions and Networks T6BN1 CDMA Base Station User Manual IHET6BN1 Part 3 of 3
Document ID166505
Application IDm4aQ0OPG2SBnnMHwOcxrhQ==
Document DescriptionIHET6BN1 User Manual Part 3 of 3
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize115.78kB (1447241 bits)
Date Submitted2001-08-25 00:00:00
Date Available2001-08-23 00:00:00
Creation Date2001-08-23 14:15:57
Producing SoftwareAcrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Document Lastmod2001-08-23 14:16:37
Document TitleIHET6BN1 User Manual Part 3 of 3

Preparing the LMF – continued
Figure 3-6: –48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate
REAR
SPAN I/O A
SITE I/O
1B
2A
2B
3A
3B
HSO/
LFR
GND
SPAN I/O B
FRONT
4A
4B
5A
5B
6A
6B
RX
LIVE TERMINALS
RGD
RGPS
1A
–48 VDC
SPAN I/O A
ALARM A
LIVE TERMINALS
SITE I/O
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
RX
TX OUT
SPAN I/O B
ALARM B
CAUTION
EXP I/O
GPS
LAN
OUT
LAN
IN
REF FW00479
ETHERNET CONNECTORS
WITH 50–OHM TERMINATORS
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-17
Using CDMA LMF
Basic LMF Operation
The CDMA LMF allows the user to work in the two following operating
environments, which are accessed using the specified desktop icon:
 Graphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF icon
 Command Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI icon
The GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operating
environment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to the
user to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit the
results of optimization and calibration actions.
Basic operation of the LMF GUI includes the following:
Selecting and deselecting BTS devices
Enabling devices
Disabling devices
Resetting devices
Obtaining device status
Sorting a status report window
For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,
refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, 68P64114A78.
Graphical User Interface
Overview
The LMF uses a GUI, which works in the following way:
 Select the device or devices.
 Select the action to apply to the selected device(s).
 While action is in progress, a status report window displays the action
taking place and other status information.
 The status report window indicates when the the action is complete
and displays other pertinent information.
 Clicking the OK button closes the status report window.
3-18
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Using CDMA LMF – continued
Command Line Interface
Overview
The LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.
Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLI
can not be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.
Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only one
handler can be running at one time Due to architectural limitations, the
GUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI to use
the same handler. When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLI
automatically finds and uses an in–progress login session with a BTS
initiated under the GUI. This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI in
the same BTS login session. If a CLI handler is already running when
the GUI is launched (this happens if the CLI window is already running
when the user starts the GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already
running when the user starts the GUI), a dialog window displays the
following warning message:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF.
Are you sure that you want to start the application?
This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts the
application. Selecting no terminates the application.
CLI Format Conventions
The CLI command can be broken down in the following way:
verb
device including device identifier parameters
switch
option parameters consisting of:
– keywords
– equals signs (=) between the keywords and the parameter values
– parameter values
Spaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and option
parameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.
Following is an example of a CLI command.
measure bbx–– rssi channel=6 sector=5
Refer to LMF CLI Commands, R15.x 68P09251A59 for a complete
explanation of the CLI commands and their use.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-19
DRAFT
Using CDMA LMF
– continued
Logging into a BTS
IMPORTANT
Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf file is
used for the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are
provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the
correct CDF files can result in invalid optimization.
Failure to use the correct CDF files to log into a live
(traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.
Logging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTS
and the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into more than one BTS at a
time, but only one LMF may be logged into each BTS.
Before attempting to log into the BTS, confirm the CDMA LMF is
properly connected to the BTS (see Figure 3-2).
Prerequisites
Before attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have been
completed:
 The LMF operating system is correctly installed and prepared.
 A bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF and CBSC file exists.
 The LMF is correctly installed and prepared, and the LMF computer is
connected to the BTS before starting the Windows operating system
and LMF software. If necessary, restart the computer after connecting
it to the BTS (see Table 3-2 and Figure 3-2).
BTS Login from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the GUI
environment.
Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure
Step
Action
Start the CDMA LMF GUI environment by clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMF is not
running).
NOTE
If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which
may be running, and start the CDMA LMF GUI environment again:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF
Are you sure you want to start the application?
Yes
No
Click on the Login tab (if not displayed).
. . . continued on next page
3-20
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Using CDMA LMF – continued
Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure
Step
Action
If no base stations are displayed in the Available Base Stations pick list, double click on the CDMA
icon.
Click on the desired BTS number.
Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).
Enter the correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2 for a field BTS) if not correctly displayed in the IP
Address box.
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI–1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP address
for MGLI–2.
Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.
Change the Multi-Channel Preselector (from the Multi-Channel Preselector pick list), normally
MPC, corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.
NOTE
When performing RX tests on expansion frames, do not choose EMPC if the test equipment is
connected to the starter frame.
Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable.
10
Click on Login.
A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.
NOTE
 If you attempt to login to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.
 There may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a device
failure).
 If the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it will have to be downloaded with code before other devices can
be seen.
 If the MGLI is OOS–RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be seen.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-21
DRAFT
Using CDMA LMF
– continued
BTS Login from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-8 to log into a BTS when using the CLI
environment.
IMPORTANT
The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to
a BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the
same BTS at the same time, logging out of the BTS in
either environment will log out of it for both. When either
a login or logout is performed in the CLI window, there is
no GUI indication that logout has occurred.
Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure
Step
Action
Double click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not already running).
NOTE
If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session when the CLI environment was started, the CLI session
will be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.
At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:
login bts– host= port=
where:
host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is
first login to this BTS).
port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first login to
this BTS).
Logging Out
Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and the
CLI operating environments.
IMPORTANT
The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to
a BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the
same BTS at the same time, logging out of the BTS in
either environment will log out of it for both. When either
a login or logout is performed in the CLI window, there is
no GUI indication that logout has occurred.
Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
. . . continued on next page
3-22
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Using CDMA LMF – continued
Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure
Step
Action
Click on Select on the BTS tab menu bar.
Click the Logout item in the pull–down menu (a Confirm Logout pop–up message appears).
Click on Yes or press the  key to confirm logout.
You are returned to the Login tab.
NOTE
If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time as the
GUI, a Logout Error pop–up message appears stating the system should not log out of the BTS.
When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for further operations.
If a Logout Error pop–up message appears stating that the system could not log out of the Base
Station because the given BTS is not logged in, perform the following actions:
– Click OK.
– Select File>Exit in the window menu bar.
– Click Yes in the Confirm Logout pop–up.
– Click Yes in the Logout Error pop–up which appears again.
If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-23
DRAFT
Using CDMA LMF
– continued
Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be done
with it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.
Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:
logout bts–
A response similar to the following is displayed:
LMF>
12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted
Command=logout bts–33
12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted
12:22:58.028 Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:
exit
A response similar to the following is displayed before the window closes:
Killing background processes....
3-24
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Using CDMA LMF – continued
Establishing an MMI
Communication Session
For those procedures that require MMI communications between the
LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedure in Table 3-11 to initiate the
communication session.
Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communications
Step
Action
Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure that requires the
MMI communication session.
Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its desktop
shortcut.
NOTE
If a desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from the Start
menu by selecting:
Programs>Accessories>Hyperterminal>HyperTerminal> key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained.
Figure 3-7: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections
To FRU MMI port
8–PIN
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
(P/N 30–09786R01)
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
RS–232 CABLE
COM1
OR
COM2
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
FW00687
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-25
DRAFT
Download the BTS
Download the BTS – Overview
Before a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain device
initialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices during
manufacture or factory repair. Device application (RAM) code and data
must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTS
can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.
ROM Code
Downloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routine
maintenance nor a normal part of the optimization process. It is only
done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in the device
does not match the release level of the site operating software AND the
CBSC cannot communicate with the BTS to perform the download. If
you must download ROM code, refer to Appendix H.
Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROM
code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.
ROM code must be manually selected for download.
RAM Code
Before RAM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correct
RAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM
code can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Device
menu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is stored
in the CDMA LMF file structure. The RAM code file is selected
automatically if the file is in the \lmf\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder
(where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code). The RAM
code file in the code folder must have the correct hardware bin number.
RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being downloaded changes to OOS-ROM
(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device
changes to OOS-RAM (yellow). When code is downloaded to an MGLI,
the LMF automatically also downloads data, and then enables the MGLI.
When enabled, the MGLI changes to INS (green).
For non–MGLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is
downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS–RAM
(yellow).
3-26
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Download the BTS – continued
Download Code to Devices
Code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download starts, the device being downloaded changes to
OOS_ROM (blue). If the download is completed successfully, the device
changes to OOS_RAM with code loaded (yellow). Prior to downloading
a device, a code file must exist. The code file is selected automatically if
the code file is in the /lmf/cdma/n.n.n.n/code folder (where n.n.n.n is the
version number of the download code that matches the “NextLoad”
parameter in the CDF file). The code file in the code folder must have
the correct hardware bin number. Code can be automatically or manually
selected.
The following are the devices to be downloaded:
 Span Configuration
– Master Group Line Interface (MGLI2)
– Slave Group Line Interface (SGLI2)
Clock Synchronization Module (CSM)
Multi Channel Card (MCC24E, MCC8E or MCC–1X)
Broadband Transceiver (BBX)
Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) – if RFDS is installed
IMPORTANT
The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with code and
data, and put INS before downloading any other device.
The download code process for an MGLI automatically
downloads data and enables the MGLI before downloading
other devices. The other devices can be downloaded in any
order.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-12 to download the firmware
application code for the MGLI2. The download code action downloads
data and also enables the MGLI2.
Prerequisite
Prior to performing this procedure, ensure a code file exists for each of
the devices to be downloaded.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-27
DRAFT
Download the BTS – continued
WARNING
R9 RAM code must NOT be downloaded to a device that
has R8 ROM code and R8 RAM code must NOT be
downloaded to a device that has R9 ROM code. All
devices in a BTS must have the same R–level ROM and
RAM code before the optimization and ATP procedures
can be performed. If a newly installed R8 BTS is to be
upgraded to R9, the optimization and ATPs should be
accomplished with the R8 code. Then the site should be
upgraded to R9 by the CBSC. The optimization and ATP
procedures do not have to be performed again after the R9
upgrade. If a replacement R8 device needs to be used in a
R9 BTS, the device ROM code can be changed with use of
the LMF before the optimization and ATPs are performed
for the BTS. Refer to the Download ROM Code section. A
R9 device can not be converted back to a R8 device in the
field without Motorola assistance.
Table 3-12: Download and Enable MGLI2
 Step
3-28
Action
Select Util>Tools>Update Next Load function to ensure the Next Load parameter is set to the
correct code version level.
Download code to the primary MGLI2 by clicking on the MGLI2.
– From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.
A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.
– Click OK to close the status window. (The MGLI2 should automatically be downloaded with
data and enabled.)
Download code and data to the redundant MGLI2 but do not enable at this time.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Download the BTS – continued
Download Code and Data to
Non–MGLI2 Devices
Non–MGLI2 devices can be downloaded individually or all equipped
devices can be downloaded with one action. Follow the procedure in
Table 3-13 to download code and data to the non–MGLI2 devices.
NOTE
When downloading multiple devices, the download may
fail for some of the devices (a time out occurs). These
devices can be downloaded separately after completing the
multiple download.
Table 3-13: Download Code and Data to Non–MGLI Devices
 Step
Action
Select all devices to be downloaded.
From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.
A status report displays the result of the download for each selected device.
Click OK to close the status window.
NOTE
After the download has started, the device being downloaded changes to blue. If the download is
completed successfully, the device changes to yellow (OOS-RAM with code loaded).
After a BBX, CSM or MCC is successfully downloaded with code and has changed to
OOS-RAM, the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.
To download the firmware application data to each device, select the target device and select:
Device>Download Data
Select CSM Clock Source
A CSM can have three different clock sources. The Clock Source
function can be used to select the clock source for each of the three
inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs to
be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clock
source options:
 Local GPS
 Remote GPS
HSO (only for sources 2 & 3)
LFR (only for sources 2 & 3)
10 MHz (only for sources 2 & 3)
NONE (only for sources 2 & 3)
Prerequisites
MGLI=INS_ACT
CSM= OOS_RAM or INS_ACT
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-29
DRAFT
Download the BTS – continued
Follow the procedure in Table 3-14 to select a CSM Clock Source.
Table 3-14: Select CSM Clock Source
Step
Action
Select the applicable CSM(s).
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Clock Source menu item.
Click on the Select menu item.
A clock source selection window is displayed.
Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists.
Uncheck the related check box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.
Click on the OK button.
A status report window displays the results of the selection action.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Enable CSMs
Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typical
operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop
(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either an
on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R–GPS).
The CSM2 card is required when using the R–GPS. The GPS receiver
(mounted on CSM–1) is the primary timing reference and synchronizes
the entire cellular system. CSM–2 provides redundancy but does not
have a GPS receiver.
The BTS may be equipped with a remote GPS, LORAN–C LFR, or
HSO 10 MHz Rubidium source, which the CSM can use as a secondary
timing reference. In all cases, the CSM monitors and determines what
reference to use at a given time.
IMPORTANT
– CSMs are code loaded at the factory. This data is
retained in EEPROM. The download code procedure
is required in the event it becomes necessary to code
load CSMs with updated software versions. Use the
status function to determine the current code load
versions.
– For non–RGPS sites only, verify the CSM configured
with the GPS receiver “daughter board” is installed in
the CSM–1 slot before continuing.
– The CSM(s) and MCC(s) to be enabled must have
been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS–RAM)
and data.
. . . continued on next page
3-30
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Download the BTS – continued
Follow the procedure in Table 3-15 to enable the CSMs.
Table 3-15: Enable CSMs
 Step
Action
Verify the CSM(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS–RAM) and data.
Click on the target CSM.
From the Device pull down, select Enable.
NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM–2 first and then CSM–1.
A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.
Click OK to close the status window.
NOTE
FAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown in
the Description field, the CSM changes to the enabled state after phase lock is achieved. CSM–1
houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour to complete.
* IMPORTANT
The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and
operated by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alters
satellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS
contains an “almanac” that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.
If an installed GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to one
hour for the GPS receiver “almanac” to be updated.
Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3-D position
fix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in-service. (In some cases, the GPS
receiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load.)
NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, the LMF should display CSM-1 as bright GREEN (INS–ACT) and
CSM–2 as dark green (INS–STB). After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, the
PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green (alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).
If more than an hour has passed, refer to Table 3-19 and Table 3-20 to determine the cause.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-31
DRAFT
Download the BTS – continued
Enable MCCs
This procedure configures the MCC and sets the “tx fine adjust”
parameter. The “tx fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,
but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the
BTS (approximately 3 ms).
Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to enable the MCCs.
IMPORTANT
The MGLI2, and primary CSM must be downloaded and
enabled (IN–SERVICE ACTIVE), before downloading and
enabling the MCC.
Table 3-16: Enable MCCs
 Step
Action
Verify the MCC(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS–RAM) and data.
Select the MCCs to be enabled or from the Select pulldown menu choose All MCCs.
From the Device menu, select Enable
A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Enable Redundant GLIs
Follow the procedure in Table 3-17 to enable the redundant GLI(s).
Table 3-17: Enable Redundant GLIs
 Step
3-32
Action
Select the target redundant GLI(s).
From the Device menu, select Enable.
A status report window confirms the change in the device(s) status and the enabled GLI(s) is
green.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
CSM & LFR Background
The primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)
boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM in
slot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy. The
CSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the remote
GPS receiver (R–GPS). R–GPS uses a GPS receiver in the antenna head
that has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have a daughter
card as a local GPS receiver to support an RF–GPS signal.
The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1
and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock Distribution
Cards (CCDs) buffer and distribute even–second reference and 19.6608
MHz clocks. CCD–1 is married to CSM–1 and CCD–2 is married to
CSM 2. A failure on CSM–1 or CCD–1 cause the system to switch to
redundant CSM–2 and CCD–2.
In a typical operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked
Loop (DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by
either an on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver
(R–GPS). The CSM2 card is required when using the R–GPS. DPLL
circuits employed by the CSM provide switching between the primary
and redundant unit upon request. Synchronization between the primary
and redundant CSM cards, as well as the LFR or HSO back–up source,
provides excellent reliability and performance.
Each CSM board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides
19.6608 MHz clock, even second tick reference, and 3 MHz sinewave
reference, referenced to the selected synchronization source (GPS,
LORAN–C Frequency Receiver (LFR), or High Stability Oscillator
(HSO), T1 Span, or external reference oscillator sources). The 3 MHz
signals are also routed to the RDM EXP 1A & 1B connectors on the top
interconnect panel for distribution to co–located frames at the site.
Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPS
synchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event of
a GPS receiver failure on CSM–1. During normal operation, the CSM–1
board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-19). The source
selection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.
All boards are mounted in the C–CCP shelf at the top of the BTS frame.
Figure 3-9 on page 3-36 illustrates the location of the boards in the BTS
frame. The diagram also shows the CSM front panel.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-33
DRAFT
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Low Frequency Receiver/
High Stability Oscillator
The CSM handles the overall configuration and status monitoring
functions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is
capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPS
reference signal.
The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN RF
signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which is
synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. The
LFR can maintain system time indefinitely after initial GPS lock.
The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary
interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those
geographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since the
HSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained
for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.
Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX
LFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to the
expansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logical
frames require an HSO–expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame has
an LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frame
and interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR and
LFR2 use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-18).
HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection
(see Table 3-18).
NOTE
Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for
60 minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM
board warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and
oscillator frequency to stabilize prior to test. Test
equipment warm-up allows the Rubidium standard
timebase to stabilize in frequency before any measurements
are made.
Front Panel LEDs
The status of the LEDs on the CSM boards are as follows:
 Steady Green – Master CSM locked to GPS or LFR (INS).
 Rapidly Flashing Green – Standby CSM locked to GPS or LFR
(STBY).
 Flashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red – CSM OOS–RAM attempting
to lock on GPS signal.
 Rapidly Flashing Green and Red – Alarm condition exists. Trouble
Notifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.
3-34
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Null Modem Cable
A null modem cable is required. It is connected between the LMF
COM1 port and the RS232–GPIB Interface box. Figure 3-8 shows the
wiring detail for the null modem cable.
Figure 3-8: Null Modem Cable Detail
9–PIN D–FEMALE
GND
RX
TX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
9–PIN D–FEMALE
ON BOTH CONNECTORS
SHORT PINS 7, 8;
SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 6
GND
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
FW00362
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 The LMF is NOT logged into the BTS.
 The COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via
a null modem board.
CSM Frequency Verification
The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the CSM
boards before performing the rf path verification tests. Parts of this
procedure will be repeated for final verification after the overall
optimization has been completed.
Test Equipment Setup: GPS &
LFR/HSO Verification
Follow the procedure in Table 3-18 to set up test equipment while
referring to Figure 3-9 as required.
Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Step
Action
Perform one of the following operations:
– For local GPS (RF–GPS), verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSM
slot 1 and that CSM–1 is INS.
NOTE
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.
– For Remote GPS (RGPS), verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM–1 is
INS
NOTE
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132CC (or subsequent).
Remove CSM–2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem
board) to the MMI port on CSM–1.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-35
DRAFT
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Step
Action
Reinstall CSM–2.
Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-5)
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
When the terminal screen appears, press the  key until the CSM> prompt appears.
Figure 3-9: CSM MMI terminal connection
REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR
CSM board shown
removed from frame
MMI SERIAL
PORT
EVEN SECOND
TICK TEST POINT
REFERENCE
GPS RECEIVER
ANTENNA INPUT
ANTENNA COAX
CABLE
GPS RECEIVER
19.6 MHZ TEST
POINT REFERENCE
(NOTE 1)
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
9–PIN TO 9–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
FW00372
LMF
NOTEBOOK
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
COM1
NOTES:
1. One LED on each CSM:
Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVE
Fast Flashing Green = OOS–RAM
Red = Fault Condition
Flashing Green & Red = Fault
3-36
RS–232 SERIAL
MODEM CABLE
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
GPS Initialization/Verification
Follow the procedure in Table 3-19 to initialize and verify proper GPS
receiver operation.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 The LMF is not logged into the BTS.
 The COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via
a null modem board (see Figure 3-9).
 The primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) have been warmed up for at
least 15 minutes.
CAUTION
 Connect the GPS antenna to the GPS RF connector
ONLY. Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receiver
can result if the GPS antenna is inadvertently connected
to any other RF connector.
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and
GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI
command
bstatus
– Observe the following typical response:
CSM Status INS:ACTIVE Slot A Clock MASTER.
BDC_MAP:000, This CSM’s BDC Map:0000
Clock Alarms (0000):
DPLL is locked and has a reference source.
GPS receiver self test result: passed
Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11
HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.
If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in
the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit
csm csmgen refsrc command.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
– If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator
temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !
– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator
is defective
– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-37
DRAFT
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):
– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.
– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.
gstatus
– Observe the following typical response:
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
(GPS)
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
3-38
GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.
Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.
Recent Change Data:
Antenna cable delay 0 ns.
Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)
Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.
GPS Receiver Status:
Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites,
Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP):
Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11
GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08
Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status:
Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status:
Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status:
Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status:
Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status:
Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status:
Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status:
Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status:
8 satellites visible.
0.
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
GPS Receiver Identification:
COPYRIGHT 1991–1996 MOTOROLA INC.
SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P
SOFTWARE VER # 8
SOFTWARE REV # 8
SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996
MODEL #
B3121P1115
HDWR P/N # _
SERIAL #
SSG0217769
MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07
OPTIONS LIST
IB
The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.
Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):
– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.
– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!
– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.
Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference
to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).
. . . continued on next page
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
If steps 1 through 5 pass, the GPS is good.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:
– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and
visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has
been entered into CDF file).
– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed”, position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be
accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.
– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
– GPS antenna connector center conductor measures approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the
shield.
– There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame
GPS input.
– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS
acquisition has taken place.
debug dpllp
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of
power) (If warmed–up proceed to step 8)
CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left.
...........etc.
NOTE
The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but the
reference oscillator will be unstable.
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.
c:17486
c:17486
c:17470
c:17486
c:17470
c:17470
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
3,
3,
1,
3,
1,
1,
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):
– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.
10
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.
debug dpllp
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-39
DRAFT
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
LFR Initialization/Verification
The LORAN–C LFR is a full size card that resides in the C–CCP Shelf.
The LFR is a completely self-contained unit that interfaces with the
CSM via a serial communications link. The CSM handles the overall
configuration and status monitoring functions of the LFR.
The LFR receives a 100 kHz, 35 kHz BW signal from up to 40 stations
(8 chains) simultaneously and provides the following major functions:
 Automatic antenna pre-amplifier calibration (using a second
differential pair between LFR and LFR antenna)
 A 1 second ±200 ηs strobe to the CSM
If the BTS is equipped with an LFR, follow the procedure in Table 3-20
to initialize the LFR and verify proper operation as a backup source for
the GPS.
NOTE
If CSMRefSrc2 = 2 in the CDF file, the BTS is equipped
with an LFR. If CSMRefSrc2 = 18, the BTS is equipped
with an HSO.
. . . continued on next page
3-40
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus  to verify that the LFR is in tracking
mode. A typical response is:
CSM> lstatus 
LFR Station
St ti
St
Status:
Clock coherence: 512
5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N
5930X 52/64 dn –1 S/N
5990
47/55 dB –6 S/N
7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N
7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N
7980X 48/54 dB –4 S/N
7980Y 46/58 dB –8 S/N
7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N
8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N
8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N
8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N
8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N
8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N
8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N
8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N
8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N
9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N
9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N
9610X 46/57 dB –5 S/N
9610Y 48/54 dB –5 S/N
9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N
9940M 50/53 dB –1 S/N
9940W 49/56 dB –4
4 S/N
9940Y 46/50 dB–10 S/N
9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N
9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N
9960X 51/63 dB –1 S/N
9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N
9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N
Note
> This must be greater
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag: . PLL Station .
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag
Flag:
Flag:S
Flag:E
Flag:E
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Flag:
Fl
Flag:
LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W
LFR Recent Change Data:
Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960
PLL GRI: 7980W
LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.
CSM>
than 100 before LFR
becomes a valid source.
> This shows the LFR is
locked to the selected
PLL station.
This search list and PLL
data must match the
configuration for the
geographical location
of the cell site.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-41
DRAFT
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Note
Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):
– Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).
– Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z
assignment.
– Verify the signal to noise (S/N) ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.
At the CSM> prompt, enter sources  to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.
– Observe the following typical response.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
–3
Yes
LFR ch A
Secondary 4
Yes
Good
–2013177
–2013177
Yes
Not used
Current reference source number: 1
LORAN–C LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source
(verified from left to right).
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
– The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
– The antenna pre–amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m
(300 ft) in length.
– A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.
– The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .
NOTE
LFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use the
underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.
3-42
Close the Hyperterminal window.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
HSO Initialization/Verification
The HSO module is a full–size card that resides in the C–CCP Shelf.
This completely self contained high stability 10 MHz oscillator
interfaces with the CSM via a serial communications link. The CSM
handles the overall configuration and status monitoring functions of the
HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the HSO is capable of maintaining
synchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal for a
limited time.
The HSO is typically installed in those geographical areas not covered
by the LORAN–C system and provides the following major functions:
 Reference oscillator temperature and phase lock monitor circuitry
 Generates a highly stable 10 MHz sine wave.
 Reference divider circuitry converts 10 MHz sine wave to 10 MHz
TTL signal, which is divided to provide a 1 PPS strobe to the CSM.
Prerequisites
 The LMF is not logged into the BTS.
 The COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via
a null modem board.
 The primary CSM and the HSO (if equipped) have warmed up for 15
minutes.
If the BTS is equipped with an HSO, follow the procedure in Table 3-21
to configure the HSO.
Table 3-21: HSO Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
At the BTS, slide the HSO card into the cage.
NOTE
The LED on the HSO should light red for no longer than 15-minutes, then switch to green. The CSM
must be locked to GPS.
On the LMF at the CSM> prompt, enter sources .
– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
Yes
N/A
xxxxxxx
–69532
Yes
Not used
Current reference source number: 0
When the CSM is locked to GPS, verify that the HSO “Good” field is Yes and the “Valid” field is Yes.
If source “1” is not configured as HSO, enter at the CSM> prompt: ss 1 12 
Check for Good in the Status field.
At the CSM> prompt, enter sources .
Verify the HSO valid field is Yes. If not, repeat this step until the “Valid” status of Yes is returned. The
HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO Rubidium
oscillator is fully warmed.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-43
DRAFT
Test Equipment Set–up
Connecting Test Equipment to
the BTS
All test equipment is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB bus.
The LMF requires each piece of test equipment to have a factory set
GPIB address. If there is a communications problem between the LMF
and any piece of test equipment, verify that the GPIB addresses have
been set correctly (normally 13 for a power meter and 18 for a CDMA
analyzer).
The following equipment is required to perform optimization:
LMF
Test set
Directional coupler and attenuator
RF cables and connectors
Refer to Table 3-22 for an overview of connections for test equipment
currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see the following figures:
 Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
 Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests.
 Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show typical TX and RX ATP setup with
a directional coupler (shown with and without RFDS).
Supported Test Sets
Optimization and ATP testing may be performed using one of the
following test sets:
CyberTest
Advantest R3465 and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
Hewlett–Packard HP 8935
Hewlett–Packard HP 8921 (W/CDMA and PCS Interface for
1.7/1.9 GHz) and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
 Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – optional
 Rubidium Standard Timebase – optional
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX test
connections must be through the directional coupler and
in-line attenuator as shown in the test setup illustrations.
3-44
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Test Equipment Reference
Chart
Table 3-22 depicts the current test equipment available meeting Motorola
standards.
To identify the connection ports, locate the test equipment presently
being used in the TEST SETS columns, and read down the column.
Where a ball appears in the column, connect one end of the test cable to
that port. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end connection(s),
reading up the column to identify the appropriate equipment/BTS port.
Table 3-22: Test Equipment Setup
TEST SETS
SIGNAL
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS
Mar 2001
Cyber–
Test
Advantest
EVEN
EVEN SEC
SEC REF SYNC IN
TIME
BASE IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
HP
8935
HP
8921A
HP
8921
W/PCS
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EXT
REF IN
Power
Meter
GPIB
Interface
LMF
Directional
Coupler & Pad*
SYNC
MONITOR
CDMA
CDMA
TIME BASE TIME BASE
IN
IN
IEEE
488
GPIB
HP–IB
HP–IB
HP–IB
TX TEST
CABLES
RF
IN/OUT
INPUT
50–OHM
RF
IN/OUT
RF
IN/OUT
RF
IN/OUT
RX TEST
CABLES
RF GEN
OUT
RF OUT
50–OHM
DUPLEX
DUPLEX
OUT
RF OUT
ONLY
BTS
FREQ
MONITOR
HP–IB
GPIB
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
SERIAL
PORT
20 DB
PAD
BTS
PORT
TX1–6
RX1–6
DRAFT
3-45
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Equipment Warm-up
IMPORTANT
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes
prior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. This
assures BTS site stability and contributes to optimization
accuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up,
hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as
warm-up time.)
Calibrating Cables
Figure 3-10 shows the cable calibration setup for various supported test
sets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location of the input and
output ports of each test set, and the right side details the set up for each
test.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS
TX OUT connector, verify there are NO CDMA BBX
channels keyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC
place the antenna (sector) assigned to the LPA under test
OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
. . . continued on next page
3-46
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Figure 3-10: Cable Calibration Test Setup
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
CALIBRATION SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÌ
ANT IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
RF GEN OUT
Note: The Directional Coupler is not used with the
Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connected
directly to the Cybertest Test Set.
B. RX TEST SETUP
A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test
cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest Test
Set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable
calibration procedure, not with the test cables for
TX calibration and ATP tests.
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RX
CABLE
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
ANT
IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
DUPLEX
OUT
Advantest Model R3465
RF OUT
50–OHM
C. TX TEST SETUP
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
INPUT
50–OHM
20 DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TX
CABLE
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
SHORT
CABLE
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
TEST
SET
TX
CABLE
Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot
be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.
FW00089
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-47
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Setup for TX Calibration
Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
Figure 3-11: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest, HP 8935, and Advantest)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
POWER
SENSOR
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÌ
FRONT PANEL
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
OUT
RF
IN/OUT
2O DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE
CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY
TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX TEST
CABLE
CONTROL
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
IN
TX
TEST
CABLE
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE
OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX
CALIBRATION/AUDIT
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
GPIB
CABLE
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR TX
RFDS
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
RF IN/OUT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
Advantest Model R3465
LAN
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
GPIB
CONNECTS TO
BACK OF UNIT
G MODE
CDMA
LMF
INPUT
50–OHM
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00094
3-48
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A W/PCS for 1.7/1.9 GHz
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
POWER
SENSOR
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
WITH UNUSED
PORT TERMINATED
POWER METER
TX
TEST
CABLE
2O DB PAD
Note: The HP 8921A cannot be used for TX
calibration. A power meter must be used.
TX
TEST
CABLE
GPIB
CABLE
TX ANTENNA
GROUP OR TX
RFDS
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
BTS
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
GPIB ADRS
LAN
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
FW00095
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-49
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Setup for Optimization/ATP
Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests.
Figure 3-13: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest, HP 8935 and Advantest)
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX
TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
OUT
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÌ
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
RF
OUT
NOTE: The Directional Coupler is not used
with the Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is
connected directly to the Cybertest Test set.
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
2O DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
BTS
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
RF IN/OUT
FREQ
MONITOR
Advantest Model R3465
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
DUPLEX OUT
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN (BNC “T”
WITH 50 OHM
TERMINATOR)
CDMA
TIMEBASE
TEST SET
IN
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
IN
RF
IN/OUT
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
GPIB ADRS
CSM
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
RF OUT
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
CDMA
LMF
GPIB CONNECTS
TO BACK OF UNIT
INPUT
50–OHM
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00096
3-50
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Figure 3-14: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface
(for 1700 and 1900 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX
TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
OUT
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN (BNC “T”
WITH 50 OHM
TERMINATOR)
CDMA
TIMEBASE
TEST SET
IN
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNITS
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
HP PCS
INTERFACE*
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RF
IN/OUT
* FOR 1700 AND
1900 MHZ ONLY
RF OUT
ONLY
2O DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
(for 800 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNIT
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
BTS
RF
IN/OUT
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
FREQ
MONITOR
RF OUT
ONLY
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
GPIB ADRS
CSM
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00097
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-51
Test Equipment Set–up
– continued
Figure 3-15: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with and without RFDS)
TX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
COBRA RFDS Detail
RX
(RFM TX)
TX RF FROM BTS FRAME
TX
(RFM RX)
RFDS RX (RFM TX) COUPLER
OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)
ASU2 (SHADED) CONNECTORS
RF FEED LINE TO
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
REMOVED
Connect TX test cable between
the directional coupler input port
and the appropriate TX antenna
directional coupler connector.
Appropriate test sets and the port
names for all model test sets are
described in Table 3-22.
40W NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
IN
RVS (REFLECTED)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATION
OUTPUT
PORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
BTS INPUT
PORT
TEST
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
NOTE:
THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH
STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.
TX
TEST
CABLE
TX TEST
CABLE
FWD
(INCIDENT)
PORT
FW00116
ONE 20 DB 20 W IN LINE
ATTENUATOR
3-52
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Figure 3-16: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with or without RFDS)
COBRA RFDS Detail
RX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
RX RF FROM BTS
FRAME
RX
(RFM TX)
TX
(RFM RX)
RFDS TX (RFM RX) COUPLER
OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)
ASU1 (SHADED) CONNECTORS
RF FEED LINE TO
TX ANTENNA
REMOVED
Connect RX test cable between
the test set and the appropriate
RX antenna directional coupler.
Appropriate test sets and the port
names for all model test sets are
described in Table 3-22.
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
OUT
RX Test
Cable
NOTE:
THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH
STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.
Mar 2001
FW00115
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-53
Test Set Calibration
Test Set Calibration
Background
Proper test equipment calibration ensures that the test equipment and
associated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and that
measurements are correct.
NOTE
If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has been
calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does not
need to be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,
communications test set, additional test equipment,
associated test cables, and adapters.)
This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.
Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables and
adapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) has
been calibrated and maintained as a set.
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter,
that makes up the calibrated test equipment set, has been
replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so
can introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrect
measurements and degradation to system performance.
IMPORTANT
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment
after it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Purpose of Test Set
Calibration
These procedures access the LMF automated calibration routine used to
determine the path losses of the supported communications analyzer,
power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antenna switch that
make up the overall calibrated test set. After calibration, the gain/loss
offset values are stored in a test measurement offset file on the LMF.
3-54
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Test Set Calibration – continued
Selecting Test Equipment
Use LMF Options from the Options menu list to select test equipment
automatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.
A Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided for
test equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when the
test equipment items are connected directly to the LMF computer via a
GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tab is used when
the test equipment is to be connected remotely via a network connection.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 Test equipment is correctly connected and turned on.
 CDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to
the GPIB box.
Manually Selecting Test
Equipment in a Serial
Connection Tab
Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the test
equipment is connected. The LMF does not check to see if the test
equipment is actually detected for manual specification. Follow the
procedure in Table 3-23 to select test equipment manually.
Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab
 Step
Action
From the Options menu, select LMF Options.
The LMF Options window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).
Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.
Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box.
Recommended Addresses
13=Power Meter
18=CDMA Analyzer
Click on Apply. (The button darkens until the selection has been committed.)
NOTE
With manual selection, the LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected and
communicating with the LMF.
Mar 2001
Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-55
Test Set Calibration – continued
Automatically Selecting Test
Equipment in a Serial
Connection Tab
When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the LMF
examines which test equipment items are actually communicating with
the LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-24 to use the auto-detect
feature.
Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect
 Step
Action
From the Options menu, select LMF Options.
The LMF Options window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on Auto–Detection (if not enabled).
Type in the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).
NOTE
When both a power meter and analyzer are selected, the first item listed in the GPIB addresses to
search box is used for RF power measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a power
meter is normally 13 and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If 13,18 is included in
the GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) is used for RF power measurements. If
the test equipment items are manually selected the CDMA analyzer is used only if a power meter
is not selected.
Click on Apply.
NOTE
The button darkens until the selection has been committed. A check mark appears in the Manual
Configuration section for detected test equipment items.
3-56
Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Test Set Calibration – continued
Calibrating Test Equipment
The calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement level
of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.
If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the power
meter is zeroed.
Use the Calibrate Test Equipment menu item from the Util menu to
calibrate test equipment. The test equipment must be selected before
calibration can begin. Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to calibrate the
test equipment.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 Test equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for tests
that are to be run.
 Test equipment has been selected.
Table 3-25: Test Equipment Calibration
 Step
Action
From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment.
A Directions window is displayed.
Follow the directions provided.
Click on Continue to close the Directions window.
A status report window is displayed.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Calibrating Cables
The cable calibration function measures the loss (in dB) for the TX and
RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is used to
measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable configuration and
RX cable configuration). The cable calibration consists of the following:
 Measuring the loss of a short cable – This is required to compensate
for any measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable (used only
for the calibration process) is used in series with both the TX and RX
cable configuration when measuring. The measured loss of the short
cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX cable
configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX cable
configurations. The result is then adjusted out of both the TX and RX
measurements to compensate for the measured loss.
 The short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss is measured –
The RX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable
with type-N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX
port of the test equipment.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-57
Test Set Calibration – continued
 The short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss is measured –
The TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables with
type-N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additional
attenuator (if required by the specified BTS). The total loss of the path
loss of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS
(normally 30 or 50 dB).
Calibrating Cables with a
CDMA Analyzer
Cable Calibration is used to calibrate both TX and RX test cables.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the cables. Figure 3-10
illustrates the cable calibration test equipment setup. Appendix F covers
the procedures for manual cable calibration.
NOTE
LMF cable calibration for PCS systems (1.7/1.9 GHz)
cannot be accomplished using an HP8921 analyzer with
PCS interface or an Advantest analyzer. A different
analyzer type or the signal generator and spectrum analyzer
method must be used (refer to Table 3-27 and Figure 3-17).
Cable calibration values are then manually entered.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 Test equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable
calibration.
 Test equipment has been selected and calibrated.
Table 3-26: Cable Calibration
 Step
Action
From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration.
A Cable Calibration window is displayed.
Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box.
NOTE
Multiple channels numbers must be separated with a comma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two
or more channels numbers are entered, the cables are calibrated for each channel. Interpolation is
accomplished for other channels as required for TX calibration.
3-58
Select TX and RX Cable Cal, TX Cable Cal, or RX Cable Cal in the Cable Calibration pick
list.
Click OK. Follow the direction displayed for each step.
A status report window displays the results of the cable calibration.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Test Set Calibration – continued
Calibrating TX Cables Using a
Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibrate the TX cables using a
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-17 for a
diagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.
Table 3-27: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
 Step
Action
Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.
Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of:
– 869–894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA
– 1930–1990 MHz for North American PCS.
– 1840–1870 MHz for KoreaN PCS
Use a spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-17, A) and record the
value.
Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point B, (as shown in the lower right portion of the
diagram) to measure cable output at customer frequency of:
– 869–894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA
– 1930–1990 MHz for North American PCS.
– 1840–1870 MHz for Korean PCS
Record the value at point B.
Calibration factor = A – B
Example:
Cal = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB
NOTE
The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is
completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures
use the correct calibration factor.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-59
Test Set Calibration – continued
Figure 3-17: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX BLO and TX ATP Tests
(using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
40W NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO
THE TX PORTS DURING TX BAY LEVEL
OFFSET TEST AND TX ATP TESTS.
50 OHM
TERMINATION
Spectrum
Analyzer
ONE 20DB 20 W IN
LINE ATTENUATOR
SHORT TEST CABLE
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE HP8481A POWER
SENSOR DURING TX BAY LEVEL OFFSET TEST AND TO THE
PCS INTERFACE BOX INPUT PORT DURING TX ATP TESTS.
Signal
Generator
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
CABLE FROM 20 DB @ 20W ATTENUATOR TO THE
PCS INTERFACE OR THE HP8481A POWER SENSOR.
FW00293
Calibrating RX Cables Using a
Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-28 to calibrate the RX cables using the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-18, if required.
Table 3-28: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
 Step
3-60
Action
Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal
Generator.
Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of:
– 824–849 for 800 MHz CDMA
– 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS
– 1750–1780 MHz for Korean PCS
Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-18, A) and record the
value for A.
Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram to measure the output at the
customer’s RX frequency of:
– 824–849 for 800 MHz CDMA
– 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS
– 1750–1780 MHz for Korean PCS
Record the value at point B.
. . . continued on next page
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Test Set Calibration – continued
Table 3-28: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
 Step
Action
Calibration factor = A – B
Example:
Cal = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dBm
NOTE
The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not be part of the final
test setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup,
as is, to ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-18: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test
(using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Signal
Generator
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
CONNECTION TO THE HP PCS
INTERFACE OUTPUT PORT
DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT TEST
CABLE
BULLET
CONNECTOR
LONG
CABLE 2
CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTS
DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
FW00294
DRAFT
3-61
Test Set Calibration – continued
Setting Cable Loss Values
Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations are
normally set by accomplishing cable calibration using the applicable test
equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable loss files. The
cable loss values can also be set/changed manually. Follow the procedure
in Table 3-29 to set cable loss values.
Prerequisites
 Logged into the BTS
Table 3-29: Setting Cable Loss Values
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit>Cable Loss>TX or RX.
A data entry pop–up window appears.
To add a new channel number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the Channel # and Loss
(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.
To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
To save displayed values, click on the Save button.
To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button.
Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.
NOTE
 If cable loss values exist for two different channels, the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.
 Entered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.
3-62
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Test Set Calibration – continued
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value
If an in–service TX coupler is installed, the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB)
must be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX
calibration and audit calculations. Follow the procedure in Table 3-30 to
set TX coupler loss values.
Prerequisites
 Logged into the BTS.
Table 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss Value
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit>TX Coupler Loss. A data entry pop–up window appears.
Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.
Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.
NOTE
 The In–Service Calibration check box in the Options>LMF Options>BTS Options tab must
checked before entered TX coupler loss values are used by the TX calibration and audit functions.
 Entered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-63
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Introduction to Bay Level
Offset Calibration
Calibration compensates for normal equipment variations within the
BTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.
RF Path Bay Level Offset
Calibration
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX
slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database calibration
table in the LMF. The BLOs are subsequently downloaded to each BBX.
For starter frames, each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port and
terminates at a backplane BBX slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBX
backplane slot, travels through the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX
antenna port.
For expansion frames each receive path starts at the BTS RX port of the
cell site starter frame, travels through the frame-to-frame expansion
cable, and terminates at a backplane BBX slot of the expansion frame.
The transmit path starts at a BBX backplane slot of the expansion frame,
travels though the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port of the
same expansion frame.
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX
slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database. Each
transmit path starts at a C–CCP shelf backplane BBX slot, travels
through the LPA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX path
calibration is performed, the RX path BLO is automatically set to the
default value.
At omni sites, BBX slots 1 and 13 (redundant) are tested. At sector sites,
BBX slots 1 through 12, and 13 (redundant) are tested. Only those slots
(sectors) actually equipped in the current CDF are tested, regardless of
physical BBX board installation in the slot.
When to Calibrate BLOs
Calibration of BLOs is required:
 After initial BTS installation
 Once each year
 After replacing any of the following components or associated
interconnecting RF cabling:
– BBX board
– C–CCP shelf
– CIO card
– CIO to LPA backplane RF cable
– LPA backplane
– LPA
. . . continued on next page
3-64
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
– TX filter / TX filter combiner
– TX thru-port cable to the top of frame
TX Path Calibration
The TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and the
first order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper function
of each RF path is verified during calibration. The external test
equipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector you must first verify that there are no
CDMA channels keyed. Have the OMC–R place the sector
assigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done,
there is a high probability that the card/module could be
damaged by ESD.
IMPORTANT
Mar 2001
At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of
each CCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated
with BBX boards), move BBX boards from shelves
currently not under test and install them into the empty
BBX slots of the shelf currently being tested to insure that
all BBX TX paths are tested.
– This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites
that are due for periodic optimization.
– Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the
correct BBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as
required to include BBX slots not currently equipped
(per Systems Engineering documentation).
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-65
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
BLO Calibration Data File
During the calibration process, the LMF creates a bts–n.cal calibration
(BLO) offset data file in the bts–n folder. After calibration has been
completed, this offset data must be downloaded to the BBXs using the
Download BLO function. An explanation of the file is shown below.
NOTE
Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that you
print out a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for the
following descriptions.
The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (a
slot Block).
Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX slots. Slot 20
contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX. Each BBX slot
header block contains:
 A creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters of
createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.
 The number of calibration entries – fixed at 720 entries corresponding
to 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header and
actual calibration data.
 The calibration data for a BBX is organized as a large flat array. The
array is organized by branch, sector, and calibration point.
– The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the
contained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main
receive and diversity receive offsets as follows:
Table 3-31: BLO BTS.cal File Array Assignments
Range
Assignment
C[1]–C[240]
Transmit
C[241]–C[480]
Main Receive
C[481]–C[720]
Diversity Receive
NOTE
Slot 385 is the BLO for the RFDS.
. . . continued on next page
3-66
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
– The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Configurations
supported are Omni, 3–sector or 6–sector.
Table 3-32: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)
BBX
Sectorization
TX
RX
RX Diversity
Slot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 12)
1 (Omni)
6 Sector,
1st
Carrier
10
6 Sector,
2nd
Carrier
11
12
3–Sector,
1st
Carrier
3–Sector,
3rd
Carrier
3–Sector,
2nd
Carrier
3–Sector,
4th
Carrier
C[1]–C[20]
C[241]–C[260]
C[481]–C[500]
C[21]–C[40]
C[261]–C[280]
C[501]–C[520]
C[41]–C[60]
C[281]–C[300]
C[521]–C[540]
C[61]–C[80]
C[301]–C[320]
C[541]–C[560]
C[81]–C[100]
C[321]–C[340]
C[561]–C[580]
C[101]–C[120]
C[341]–C[360]
C[581]–C[600]
C[121]–C[140]
C[361]–C[380]
C[601]–C[620]
C[141]–C[160]
C[381]–C[400]
C[621]–C[640]
C[161]–C[180]
C[401]–C[420]
C[641]–C[660]
C[181]–C[200]
C[421]–C[440]
C[661]–C[680]
C[201]–C[220]
C[441]–C[460]
C[681]–C[700]
C[221]–C[240]
C[461]–C[480]
C[701]–C[720]
Slot[20]] (Redundant BBX–13)
1 (Omni)
6 Sector,
1st
Carrier
10
11
12
6 Sector,
2nd
Carrier
3–Sector,
1st
Carrier
3–Sector,
3rd
Carrier
3–Sector,
2nd
Carrier
3–Sector,
4th
Carrier
C[1]–C[20]
C[241]–C[260]
C[481]–C[500]
C[21]–C[40]
C[261]–C[280]
C[501]–C[520]
C[41]–C[60]
C[281]–C[300]
C[521]–C[540]
C[61]–C[80]
C[301]–C[320]
C[541]–C[560]
C[81]–C[100]
C[321]–C[340]
C[561]–C[580]
C[101]–C[120]
C[341]–C[360]
C[581]–C[600]
C[121]–C[140]
C[361]–C[380]
C[601]–C[620]
C[141]–C[160]
C[381]–C[400]
C[621]–C[640]
C[161]–C[180]
C[401]–C[420]
C[641]–C[660]
C[181]–C[200]
C[421]–C[440]
C[661]–C[680]
C[201]–C[220]
C[441]–C[460]
C[681]–C[700]
C[221]–C[240]
C[461]–C[480]
C[701]–C[720]
 Ten calibration points per sector are supported for each branch. Two
entries are required for each calibration point.
 The first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel
(frequency) where the BLO is measured. The second value (all even
entries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from
2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500
corresponds to +125 dBm).
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-67
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
 The 20 calibration entries for each sector/branch combination must be
stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points
(frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated is
repeated to fill out the 10 points.
Example:
C[1]=384,
odd cal entry
= 1 ‘‘calibration point”
C[2]=19102, even cal entry
C[3]=777,
C[4]=19086,
C[19]=777,
C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this
would be repeated for the next 8 points)
 When the BBX is loaded with image = data, the cal file data for the
BBX is downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the cal
file. TxCal data is sent first, C[1] – C[240]. Sector 1’s ten calibration
points are sent (C[1] – C[20]) followed by sector 2’s ten calibration
points (C[21] – C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next (C[241] –
C[480]), followed by the RxDCal data (C[481] – C[720]).
 Temperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for each
set.
Test Equipment Setup:
RF Path Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table 3-33 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-33: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)
Step
Action
NOTE
Verify the GPIB controller is properly connected and turned on.
! CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB
directional coupler for 800 MHz with an additional 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1.7/1.9 GHz.
Connect the LMF computer terminal to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS (if you have not
already done so). Refer to the procedure in Table 3–2 on page 3-6.
 If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-25 on page 3-57.
 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 starting on page 3-48.
3-68
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
TX Path Calibration
The assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the top
of the frame) for transmit calibration are derived from the site CDF files.
For each BBX, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelList
CDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwr
CDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX (located
under the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF file
parameter).
NOTE
If both the BTS–x.cdf and CBSC–x.cdf files are current,
all information will be correct on the LMF. If not, the
carrier and channel will have to be set for each test.
The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dB
of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than
+1.5 dB.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupler
option, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.
 At sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately
42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output power
measured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level
(approximately –6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,
is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Output
minus BBX output level.
 Example: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler
(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately
–2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately
–0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.
The LMF Tests menu list items, TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit,
perform the TX BLO Calibration test for a XCVR(s). The All Cal/Audit
menu item performs TX calibration, downloads BLO, and performs TX
audit if the TX calibration passes. All measurements are made through
the appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
 CSM–1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct code load and data
load.
 Primary CSM and MGLI are INS.
 All BBXs are OOS_RAM.
 Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-69
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 and
follow the procedure in Table 3-34 to perform the TX calibration test.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
IMPORTANT
Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have been
returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards
moved since they were downloaded will have to be
downloaded again.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-34 to perform the TX calibration test.
Table 3-34: BTS TX Path Calibration
 Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be calibrated.
From the Tests menu, select TX Calibration or All Cal/Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list. (Press and hold the
 or  key to select multiple items.)
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
3-70
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Download BLO Procedure
After a successful TX path calibration, download the bay level offset
(BLO) calibration file data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the
CAL file for the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) and downloaded to
the selected BBX devices.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this
procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is
downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 BBXs being downloaded are OOS–RAM (yellow).
 TX calibration is successfully completed.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-35 to download the BLO data to the
BBXs.
Table 3-35: Download BLO
 Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.
From the Device menu, select Download BLO.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Calibration Audit Introduction
The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation
and storage of the BLO calibration offsets. The calibration audit
procedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path at
the site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the
success or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is
used.
IMPORTANT
Mar 2001
RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data
download to BBXs must have been successfully completed
prior to performing the calibration audit.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-71
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
TX Path Audit
Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slots,
per the procedure in Table 3-36
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this
procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is
downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.
TX Audit Test
The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a
BBX(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output
connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
CSM–1, GLI2s, and BBXs have correct code load and data load.
Primary CSM and MGLI are INS.
All BBXs are OOS_RAM.
Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-36 to perform the BTS TX Path Audit
test.
. . . continued on next page
3-72
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Table 3-36: BTS TX Path Audit
 Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be audited.
From the Tests menu, select TX Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the Status Report window and provides information in the
Description field. Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the
test. If the tests fail again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to
Chapter 6, Troubleshooting.
All Cal/Audit Test
The Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibration
and Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the
appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
NOTE
If the TX calibration portion of the test passes, the BLO
data is automatically downloaded to the BBX(s) before the
audit portion of the test is run.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-73
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
CSM–1, GLI2s, BBXs have correct code and data loads.
Primary CSM and MGLI2 are INS.
All BBXs are OOS_RAM.
Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-37 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Table 3-37: All Cal/Audit Test
 Step
Select the BBX(s) to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
Click on OK.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
3-74
Action
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Create CAL File
The Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and
creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist, a
new one is created. If a CAL file already exists, it is updated. After a
BTS has been fully optimized, a copy of the CAL file must exist so it
can be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully
performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file
exists. Note the following:
 The Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)
BBXs.
WARNING
The user is not encouraged to edit the CAL file as this
action can cause interface problems between the BTS and
the LMF. To manually edit the CAL file, you must first
logout of the BTS. If you manually edit the CAL file and
then use the Create Cal File function, the edited
information is lost.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
 BBXs are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded.
Table 3-38: Create CAL File
 Step
Action
Select the applicable BBXs.
NOTE
The CAL file is only updated for the selected BBXs.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Create Cal File menu item.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
Click OK to close the status report window.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-75
RFDS Setup and Calibration
RFDS Description
NOTE
The RFDS is not available for the –48 V BTS at the time
of this publication.
The optional RFDS performs RF tests of the site from the CBSC or from
an LMF. The RFDS consists of the following elements:
 Antenna Select Unit (ASU)
 FWT Interface Card (FWTIC)
 Subscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)
For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA RFDS
Hardware Installation manual and CDMA RFDS User’s Guide.
The LMF provides the following functions for RFDS equipment:
3-76
TX and RX Calibration
Dekey Test Subscriber Unit (TSU)
Download Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC)
Forward Test
Key TSU
Measure TSU Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI)
Ping TSU
Program TSU Number Assignment Module (NAM)
Reverse Test
RGLI actions (for GLI based RFDS units)
Set ASU
Status TSU
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
RFDS Parameter Settings
The bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must
match the installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the
editable parameters and their defaults. Table 3-39 explains how to edit
the parameter settings.
 RfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.
0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped
1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS
2 = Cobra RFDS
 TsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) TSU not equipped
1 = TSU is equipped in the system
 MC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system
(9600 system RFDS only)
 Asu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Equipped
 TestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to
15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when
originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,
and is to be used in this field.)
NOTE
Any text editor supporting the LMF may be used to open
any text files to verify, view, or modify data.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-77
DRAFT
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Log out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.
Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file
(1 = GLI based RFDS; 2 = Cobra RFDS).
EXAMPLE:
RfdsEquip = 2
TsuEquip = 1
MC1Equip = 0
MC2Equip = 0
MC3Equip = 0
MC4Equip = 0
Asu1Equip = 1
Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)
TestOrigDN = ’123456789’’
NOTE
The above is an example of the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated by the OMC and
copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC if the RFDSPARM database is
modified for the RFDS.
Save and/or quit the editor. If any changes were made to these fields, data will need to be downloaded
to the GLI2 (see Step 3, otherwise proceed to Step 4).
To download to the GLI2, click on the Device menu and select the Download Data menu item
(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded).
A status report window displays the status of the download.
Click OK to close the status report window.
! CAUTION
After downloading data to the GLI2, the RFDS LED slowly begins flashing red and green for
approximately 2–3 minutes. DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED
remains green.
Status the RFDS TSU.
A status report window displays the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.
* IMPORTANT
If the LMF yields an error message, check the following:
3-78
Ensure the AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.
Verify the RFDS has power.
Verify the RFDS status LED is green.
Verify fields in the bts-#.cdf file are correct (see Step 1).
Status the MGLI and ensure the device is communicating (via Ethernet) with the LMF, and the
device is in the proper state (INS).
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
RFDS TSU NAM Programming
The RFDS TSU NAM must be programmed with the appropriate system
parameters and phone number during hardware installation. The TSU
phone and TSU MSI must be recorded for each BTS used for OMC–R
RFDS software configuration. The TSU NAM should be configured the
same way that any local mobile subscriber would use.
NOTE
The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial
install of the RFDS.
The NAM must be programmed into the SUA before it can receive and
process test calls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.
Explanation of Parameters
used when Programming the
TSU NAM
Table 3-40 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.
Table 3-40: Definition of Parameters
Access_Overload_Code
Slot_Index
System ID
Network ID
These parameters are obtained from the switch.
Primary_Channel_A
Primary_Channel_B
Secondary_Channel_A
Secondary_Channel B
These parameters are the channels used in operation of the system.
Lock_Code
Security_Code
Service_Level
Station_Class_Mark
Do not change.
IMSI_11_12
IMSI_MCC
These fields can be obtained at the OMC using the following
command:
OMC000>disp bts–# imsi
If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,
otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.
MIN_1 Phone Number
This field is the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN and
MIN should be entered into the switch as well.
NOTE: This field is different from the TestOrigDN field in the
bts.cdf file. The MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber,
and the TestOrigDN is the number is subscriber calls.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-79
DRAFT
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Valid NAM Ranges
Table 3-41 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are
missing or out of range, the RFDS errors out.
Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field Ranges
Valid Range
Minimum
Maximum
15
Slot_Index
System ID
32767
Network ID
32767
Primary_Channel_A
25
1175
Primary_Channel_B
25
1175
Secondary_Channel_A
25
1175
Secondary_Channel_B
25
1175
Lock_Code
999
Security_Code
999999
Service_Level
Station_Class_Mark
255
IMSI_11_12
99
IMSI_MCC
999
N/A
N/A
NAM Field Name
Access_Overload_Code
MIN Phone Number
3-80
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Set Antenna Map Data
The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is required if an
RFDS is installed. Antenna map data does not have to be entered if an
RFDS is not installed. The antenna map data must be entered manually.
Perform the procedure in Table 3-42 to set the Antenna Map Data.
Prerequisite
 Logged into the BTS
Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit>Antenna Map>TX or RX.
A data entry pop–up window appears.
Enter/edit values as required for each carrier.
NOTE
Refer to the Util >Edit–antenna map LMF help screen for antenna map examples.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
NOTE
Entered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.
NOTE
Values entered/changed after using the Save button are not saved.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-81
DRAFT
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Set RFDS Configuration Data
If an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manually
entered. Perform the procedure in Table 3-43 to set the RFDS
Configuration Data.
Prerequisite
 Logged into the BTS.
IMPORTANT
The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to
the antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.
Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data
Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit>RFDS Configuration>TX or RX.
A data entry pop–up window appears.
To add a new antenna number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the other columns and enter
the desired data.
To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
NOTE
Refer to the Util >Edit–RFDS Configuration LMF help screen for RFDS configuration data
examples.
To delete a row, click on the row and click on the Delete Row button.
To save displayed values, click on the Save button.
NOTE
 Entered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.
To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button .
NOTE
Values entered/changed after using the Save button are not saved.
3-82
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
RFDS Calibration
The RFDS TX and RX antenna paths must be calibrated to ensure peak
performance. The RFDS calibration option calibrates the RFDS TX and
RX paths.
For a TX antenna path calibration, the BTS XCVR is keyed at a
pre–determined power level and the BTS power output level is measured
by the RFDS. The power level is then measured at the TX antenna
directional coupler by the power measuring test equipment item being
used (power meter or analyzer). The difference (offset) between the
power level at the RFDS and the power level at the TX antenna
directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration offset value.
For an RX antenna path calibration, the RFDS is keyed at a
pre–determined power level and the power input level is measured by the
BTS XCVR. A CDMA signal at the same power level measured by the
BTS XCVR is then injected at the RX antenna directional coupler by the
RFDS keyed power level and the power level measured at the BTS
XCVR is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.
The TX and RX RFDS calibration offset values are written to the CAL
file.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 BBXs are INS_TEST.
 Cable calibration has been performed
 TX calibration has been performed and BLO has been downloaded for
the BTS.
 Test equipment has been connected correctly for a TX calibration.
 Test equipment has been selected and calibrated.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-44 to calibrate the TX and RX antenna
paths.
Table 3-44: RFDS Calibration Procedure
 Step
Action
Select the RFDS tab.
Select the RFDS menu.
Select the RFDS Calibration menu item.
Select the appropriate direction (TX or RX) in the Direction pick list.
Type the appropriate channel number(s) in the Channel box.
NOTE
Separate channel numbers with a comma or dash (no spaces) if using more than one channel
number (e.g., 247,585,742 or 385–395 for numbers through and including).
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-83
DRAFT
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Table 3-44: RFDS Calibration Procedure
 Step
Action
Select the appropriate carrier(s) in the Carriers pick list.
NOTE
Use the  or  key to select multiple carriers.
Select the appropriate Rx branch (Main, Diversity or Both) in the RX Branch pick list.
Select the appropriate baud rate (1=9600, 2=14400) in the Rate Set pick list.
Click OK.
A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop-up window.
10
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the results of the actions.
11
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
12
Click on the BTS tab.
13
Click on the MGLI.
14
Download the CAL file which has been updated with the RFDS offset data to the selected GLI
device by clicking on Device>Download Data from the tab menu bar and pulldown.
NOTE
The MGLI automatically transfers the RFDS offset data from the CAL file to the RFDS.
Program TSU NAM
Follow the procedure in Table 3-45 to program the TSU NAM. The
NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test calls,
or be used for any type of RFDS test.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 MGLI is INS.
 TSU is powered up and has a code load.
Table 3-45: Program the TSU NAM
Step
Action
Select the RFDS tab.
Select the SUA (Cobra RFDS) or TSU (GLI based RFDS).
Click on the TSU menu.
Click on the Program TSU NAM menu item.
Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-40 and Table 3-41).
Click on the OK button to display the status report.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
3-84
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
Objective
This section tests the redundancy options that could be included in the
cell site. These tests verify, under a fault condition, that all modules
equipped with redundancy switch operations to their redundant partner
and resume operation. An example would be to pull the currently active
CSM and verify the standby CSM takes over distribution of the CDMA
reference signal.
Redundancy covers many BTS modules. Confirm the redundant options
included in the BTS, and proceed as required. If the BTS has only basic
power supply redundancy, the tests and procedures detailed in the
following tables should be bypassed.
Table 3-48. Miscellaneous Alarm Tests (BTS Frame)
Table 3-49. BBX Redundancy Tests (BTS Frame)
Table 3-50. CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy Alarm Tests
Table 3-51. LPA Redundancy Test
 Table 3-52. MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test
During redundancy verification of the test, alarms reported by the master
GLI (displayed via the alarm monitor) will also be verified/noted.
Test Equipment
The following pieces of test equipment are required to perform this test:
 LMF
 Communications Test Set
Redundancy/Alarm Test
Perform each of the following tests to verify BTS redundancy and to
confirm all alarms are received and reported by the BTS equipment. The
procedures should be performed on the following modules/boards:
Mar 2001
Power supply/converter modules in all frames
Distribution shelf modules in the BTS frame
C–CCP shelf modules in the BTS frame (except MCCs)
LPA modules in the BTS frame
AMR Customer defined input/output tests
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A61
3-85
DRAFT
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
Test Equipment Setup
Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to set up test equipment:
NOTE
All alarm tests are performed using TX antenna 1
Table 3-46: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step
Action
Interface the LMF computer to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS frame (refer to Table 3-2,
page 3-5).
Login to the BTS.
Set up test equipment for TX Calibration at TXOUT1 (see Figure 3-11 or Figure 3-12).
* IMPORTANT
If site is not equipped for redundancy, remove all GLI2 and BBX boards installed in any redundant
slot positions at this time.
Display the alarm monitor by selecting Util>Alarm Monitor.
Unequip all customer defined AMR alarms reported via the AMR Alarm connector (A & B) by
clicking on MGLI, then selecting Device>Customer Alarm Inputs>Unequipped.
NOTE
During configuration of MGLI alarm reporting, spurious alarms may report. Allow the BTS to
stabilize for 10 seconds. If any alarms are actively being reported after the BTS has stabilized,
determine the cause before proceeding further.
3-86
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A61
Mar 2001
DRAFT
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
Power Supply Redundancy
Follow the steps in Table 3-47 to verify redundancy of the power supply
modules. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the alarm
monitor) are also verified.
Table 3-47: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
Select the MGLI (highlight) and from the pulldown menu select:
Device>Set Redundant Sector>None/0
Device>Set Pilot>Only>Carrier–#–1-1
Device>Set Pilot>Only>Carrier–#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 262
Select (highlight) BBX–1 and from the pulldown menu select Device>Key XCVR.
Set XCVR gain to 40 and enter the correct XCVR channel number.
Remove PS–1 from the power distribution shelf (see Figure 3-19).
– Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
– Verify no other modules went OOS.
Re-install PS–1.
Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for PS–2 and PS–3.
NOTE
For +27 V systems, skip to step 7 through step 10.
On –48 V systems, remove PS–4 (see Figure 3-20).
– Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
– Verify no other modules went OOS.
Re-install PS–4.
Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.
Repeat steps 7 and 8 for PS–5 through PS–9.
10
Verify that all PWR/ALM LEDs are GREEN.
11
Select BBX-1 and Device>Dekey XCVR
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A61
3-87
DRAFT
3-88
CCD–1
CCD–2
PS–2
CSM–2
PS–6
GLI2–2
GLI2–1
MCC24–7
MCC24–1
MCC24–8
MCC24–2
MCC24–9
MCC24–3
MCC24–10
MCC24–4
MCC24–11
MCC24–5
MCC24–12
MCC24–6
BBX2–7
BBX2–1
BBX2–8
BBX2–2
BBX2–9
BBX2–3
BBX2–10
BBX2–4
BBX2–11
BBX2–5
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
1B
3B
2D
1A 30
30
2B
30
4B
3D
4D
3C 30
4C 30
4A 30
L 2C
A 3A
1D
CIO
2A 30
BBX2–R
1C 30
BBX2–6
Switch
68P09253A61
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
PS–9
REAR
FRONT
PS–8
AMR–1
AMR–2
MPC/EMPC–1
MPC/EMPC–2
PS–3
38 mm Filler Panel
PS–7
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
PS–5
REAR
FRONT
PS–4
BBX2–12
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
CSM–1
Figure 3-19: SC 4812T C–CCP Shelf
PS–1
AMR
Mar 2001
NOTE: MCCs may be
MCC8Es, MCC24s, or
MCC–1Xs. BBXs may
be BBX2s or BBX–1Xs.
FW00501
DRAFT
FW00295
Á
Á
Á Á
Á
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
19 mm Filler Panel
Figure 3-20: –48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf
HSO/LFR
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
Miscellaneous
Alarm/Redundancy Tests
Follow the steps in Table 3-48 to verify alarms reported by the master
GLI are displayed via the alarm monitor if a BTS frame module failure
occurs.
Table 3-48: Miscellaneous Alarm Tests
Step
Action
Select Util>Alarm Monitor to display the alarm monitor window.
Perform the following to verify fan module alarms:
• Unseat a fan module (see Figure 3-21 or Figure 3-22).
• Observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).
• Replace fan module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
• Repeat for all other fan modules in the BTS frame.
NOTE
Follow Step 3 for Starter Frames and Step 4 for Expansion Frames.
Starter Frames Only:
Perform the following to verify MPC module alarms.
• Unseat MPC modules (see Figure 3-19) one at a time.
• Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
• Replace the MPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports the alarm clears.
Expansion Frames Only:
Perform the following to verify EMPC module alarms.
• Unseat EMPC modules (see Figure 3-19) one at a time
• Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
• Replace the EMPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
If equipped with AMR redundancy, perform the following to verify AMR module redundancy/alarms.
• Unseat AMR 2 (see Figure 3-19).
• Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).
• Repeat Steps 1 through 3 and/or 4.
• Replace the AMR module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
• Unseat AMR 1 and observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm
monitor).
• Replace the AMR module and verify the LMF reports the alarm has cleared.
NOTE
All PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at the completion of this test.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A61
3-89
DRAFT
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
Figure 3-21: +27 V BTS C-CCP Fan Modules
LATCHES
FAN
MODULE
REAR
FAN
MODULE
REAR
REAR
PWR/ALM
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
FRONT
PWR/ALM
FRONT
FAN MODULES
FW00130
Figure 3-22: –48 V BTS C-CCP and Power Conversion Shelf Fan Modules
LATCHES
FAN
MODULE
REAR
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
REAR
PWR/ALM
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
REAR
PWR/ALM
FRONT
PWR/ALM
FAN MODULES
LATCHES
FAN
MODULE
REAR
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
REAR
PWR/ALM
FRONT
PWR/ALM
FW00489
FAN MODULES
3-90
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A61
Mar 2001
DRAFT
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
BBX Redundancy
Follow the steps in Table 3-49 to verify redundancy of the BBXs in the
C–CCP shelf. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the
alarm monitor) are also verified. This test can be repeated for additional
sectors at the customer’s discretion.
Table 3-49: BBX Redundancy Alarms
Step
Action
n WARNING
Any BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TX
output assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so could
result in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.
Enable the primary, then the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX and
Device>Key Xcvr.
Observe that primary BBXs key up, and a carrier is present at each respective frequency.
Remove the primary BBX.
Observe a carrier is still present.
The Redundant BBX is now the active BBX for Antenna 1.
Replace the primary BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.
Re-enable the primary BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each respective
frequency.
Remove the redundant BBX and observe a carrier is still present.
The Primary BBX is now the active BBX for ANT 1.
Replace the redundant BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.
10
Re-enable the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each
respective frequency:
11
De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>Dekey Xcvr.
12
Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for additional BBXs/antennas, if equipped.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A61
3-91
DRAFT
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO
Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Follow the procedure in Table 3-50 to verify the manual redundancy of
the CSM, GPS, and LFR/HSO boards. Verification of alarms reported is
also covered.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT perform the procedure in Table 3-50, unless the
site is configured with a LORAN–C or HSO timebase as a
backup for the GPS.
Table 3-50: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step
Action
n WARNING
Any BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TX
output assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so could
result in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.
Enable the primary, then the redundant BBXs assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX and
Device>Key Xcvr.
Disconnect the GPS antenna cable, located on top of the BTS frame (see Figure 3-23).
This forces the LORAN–C LFR or HSO board timebase to become the CDMA timing source.
Observe a CDMA timing reference alarm and source change is reported by the alarm monitor.
Allow the LFR/HSO to become the active timing source.
 Verify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.
 Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to LFR/HSO reference.
 Observe the PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panel are steady GREEN.
Reconnect the GPS antenna cable.
Allow the GPS to become the active timing source.
 Verify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.
 Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer back to the GPS reference.
 Observe the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 1 are steady GREEN.
Disable CSM 1 and enable CSM 2.
 Various CSM source and clock alarms are now reported and the site comes down.
 Alarms clear when the site comes back up.
. . . continued on next page
3-92
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A61
Mar 2001
DRAFT
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
Table 3-50: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step
Action
Allow the CSM 2 board to go INS_ACT.
 Verify the BBXs are dekeyed and OOS, and the MCCs are OOS_RAM.
 Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 2 reference.
 Observe the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 2 front panels are steady GREEN.
NOTE
It can take up to 20 minutes for the CSM to re-establish the GPS link and go INS. MCCs go
OOS_RAM.
Key BBXs 1 and R and observe a carrier is present.
10
Repeat Steps 2 through 6 to verify CSM source redundancy with CSM 2.
* IMPORTANT
DO NOT ENABLE the redundant CSM.
11
Disable CSM 2 and enable CSM 1.
 Various CSM Source and Clock alarms are reported and the site comes down.
 Alarms clear when the site comes back up.
12
De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>Dekey Xcvr.
13
Allow the CSM 1 board to go INS_ACT.
 Verify the BBXs are de-keyed and OOS.
 Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 1 reference.
 Observe PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panels are steady GREEN.
14
Disable the primary and redundant BBXs.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A61
3-93
DRAFT
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
Figure 3-23: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate
REAR
SPAN I/O A
RGPS
SPAN I/O A
SITE I/O
1B
2A
SPAN I/O B
LFR/
HSO
2B
GND
RX
3A
3B
4A
4B
5A
5B
6A
6B
LIVE TERMINALS
RGD
1A
+27 VDC
ALARM A
LIVE TERMINALS
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
TX OUT
SPAN I/O B
ALARM B
CAUTION
EXP I/O
GPS
LAN
OUT
LAN
IN
REF FW00215
FRONT
GPS IN
3-94
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A61
Mar 2001
DRAFT
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
LPA Redundancy Test
Follow the procedure in Table 3-51 to verify redundancy of the LPAs.
WARNING
First verify there are no BBX channels keyed BEFORE
moving the antenna connection. Failure to do so can result
in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Table 3-51: LPA Redundancy Test
Step
Action
From the pulldown menu select:
Device > Set Redundant Sector > None/0
Device > Set Pilot > Only > Carrier–#–1-1
Device > Set Pilot > Only > Carrier–#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 262
Key-up the BBX assigned to the LPAs associated with the sector under test (gain = 40).
Adjust the communications test set spectrum analyzer, as required, to observe the overall carrier
amplitude and IM Shelf and note for reference. These figures will be required later.
NOTE
See Figure 3-13 for test equipment setup, if required.
Push-in and release the breaker supplying the 1st LPA of the pair.
NOTE
After power is removed, IM suppression takes a few seconds to settle out while compensating for the
removal of the 1st LPA. The overall gain decreases by approximately 6 dB. The process must be
complete before proceeding.
Verify:
• The other LPA module did not go OOS due to the loss of the LPA.
• The overall carrier amplitude is reduced by approximately 6 dB and IM suppression on the analyzer
display remains basically unchanged.
• LPA fault message is reported via the MGLI and displayed on the alarm monitor.
Re-apply power to the LPA module and observe the alarm has cleared on the alarm monitor.
NOTE
All PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at completion of test.
Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to verify the 2nd LPA of the pair.
De-key the BBX.
n WARNING
First verify there are no BBX channels keyed when moving the antenna connection. Failure to do so
can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Repeat Steps 1 through 8 to verify LPAs assigned to sectors 2 and 3 (if equipped). Move the test cable
on top of the BTS to TX OUT 2 and TX OUT 3 antenna connectors as required.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A61
3-95
DRAFT
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test
CAUTION
This test can only be performed when the MM path is
established by the MM (not just with LAPD link
connected). Attempting to force the GLIs to “hot swap”
under alarm monitor control, when isolated from the MM,
causes MGLIs to hang up.
Table 3-52: MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test (with MM Connection Established)
Step
Action
NOTE
 This test assumes the alarm monitor is NOT connected to the BTS and the T1/E1 span is connected
and communication is established with the MM.
 BOTH GLIs must be INS before continuing.
Verify the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.
Identify the primary and redundant MGLI pairs.
Pull the MGLI that is currently INS–ACT and has cage control.
Observe the BBX remains GREEN, and the redundant MGLI is now active.
Verify no other modules go OOS due to the transfer of control to the redundant module.
Verify that the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.
Reinstall the MGLI and have the OMCR/CBSC place it back in-service.
Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to verify the other MGLI/GLI board.
3-96
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
68P09253A61
Mar 2001
DRAFT
BTS Alarms Testing
Alarm Test Overview
ALARM connectors provide Customer Defined Alarm Inputs and
Outputs. The customer can connect BTS site alarm input sensors and
output devices to the BTS, thus providing alarm reporting of active
sensors as well controlling output devices.
The SC 4812T is capable of concurrently monitoring 36 input signals
coming into the BTS. These inputs are divided between 2 Alarm
connectors marked ‘ALARM A’ and ‘ALARM B’ located at the top of
the frame (see Figure 3-24). The ALARM A connector is always
functional; ALARM B is functional when an AMR module is equipped
in the AMR 2 slot in the distribution shelf. ALARM A port monitors
input numbers 1 through 18, while ALARM B port monitors input
numbers 19 through 36 (see Figure 3-25). State transitions on these input
lines are reported to the LMF and OMCR as MGLI Input Relay alarms.
ALARM A and ALARM B connectors each provide 18 inputs and 8
outputs. If both A and B are functional, 36 inputs and 16 outputs are
available. They may be configured as redundant. The configuration is set
by the CBSC.
Alarm Reporting Display
The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur
after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,
select Util>Alarm Monitor.
The following buttons are included:
 The Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor, and
Major) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level of
alarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desired
alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the  key (for
individual selections) or  key (for a range of selections) while
clicking on the desired levels.
 The Pause button pauses/stops the display of alarms. When the Pause
button is clicked the name of the button changes to Continue. When
the Continue button is clicked, the display of alarms continues.
Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is clicked and
the Continue button is clicked are not displayed.
 The Clear button clears the Alarm Monitor display. New alarms that
occur after the Clear button is clicked are displayed.
 The Dismiss button dismisses/closes the Alarm Monitor display.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-97
DRAFT
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
Figure 3-24: Alarm Connector Location and Connector Pin Numbering
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Á
ÁÁ Á
Á
59
59
60
60
FW00301
Purpose
The following procedures verify the customer defined alarms and relay
contacts are functioning properly. These tests are performed on all AMR
alarms/relays in a sequential manner until all have been verified. Perform
these procedures periodically to ensure the external alarms are reported
properly. Following these procedures ensures continued peak system
performance.
Study the site engineering documents and perform the following tests
only after first verifying that the AMR cabling configuration required to
interconnect the BTS frame with external alarm sensors and/or relays
meet requirements called out in the SC 4812T Series BTS Installation
Manual.
IMPORTANT
Motorola highly recommends that you read and understand
this procedure in its entirety before starting this procedure.
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required to perform these tests:
 LMF
 Alarms Test Box (CGDSCMIS00014) –optional
. . . continued on next page
3-98
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
NOTE
Abbreviations used in the following figures and tables are
defined as:
 NC = normally closed
 NO = normally open
 COM or C = common
 CDO = Customer Defined (Relay) Output
 CDI = Customer Defined (Alarm) Input
Figure 3-25: AMR Connector Pin Numbering
A CDI 18
...
A CDI 1
Returns
60
26
60
26
59
25
59
25
ALARM A
(AMR 1)
Returns
ALARM B
(AMR 2)
B CDI 36
...
B CDI 19
FW00302
NOTE
The preferred method to verify alarms is to follow the
Alarms Test Box Procedure, Table 3-53. If not using an
Alarm Test Box, follow the procedure listed in Table 3-54.
CDI Alarm Input Verification
with Alarms Test Box
Table 3-53 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification using
the Alarm Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed and compare results
with the LMF display.
NOTE
It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The
default delay is 5 seconds. Leave the alarms test box
switches in the new position until the alarms have been
reported.
Table 3-53: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.
Select the MGLI.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-99
DRAFT
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
Table 3-53: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.
Click on N.O. Inputs.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector (see Figure 3-24).
Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for
each switch setting.
10
Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported
for each switch setting.
11
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
12
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
13
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for each
switch setting
14
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported for each
switch setting.
15
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
16
Select the MGLI.
17
Click on the Device menu.
18
Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.
19
Click on N.C. Inputs. A status report window displays the results of the action.
20
Click OK to close the status report window.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.
21
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
22
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 18.
23
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
24
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
25
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
. . . continued on next page
3-100
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
Table 3-53: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
26
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
A clear alarm should be reported for alarm inputs 19 through 36.
27
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
28
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
29
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
30
Select the MGLI.
31
Click on the Device menu.
32
Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.
33
Click on Unequipped.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
34
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
35
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.
36
Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.
No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.
37
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
38
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
39
Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.
No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.
40
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
41
Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-101
DRAFT
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
CDI Alarm Input Verification
without Alarms Test Box
Table 3-54 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification
without the use of the Alarms Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed
and compare results with the LMF display.
NOTE
It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The
default delay is 5 seconds. When shorting alarm pins wait
for the alarm report before removing the short.
Table 3-54: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.
Select the MGLI.
Click on the Device menu
Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.
Click on N.O. Inputs.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Refer to Figure 3-25 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
Refer to Figure 3-25 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
Select the MGLI.
10
Click on the Device menu.
11
Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.
12
Click on N.C. Inputs.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
13
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.
. . . continued on next page
3-102
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
Table 3-54: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
14
Refer to Figure 3-25 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
15
Refer to Figure 3-25 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
16
Select the MGLI.
17
Click on the Device menu
18
Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.
19
Click on Unequipped.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
20
Click on OK to close the status report window.
21
Refer to Figure 3-25 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
No alarms should be displayed.
22
Refer to Figure 3-25 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
No alarms should be displayed.
23
Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.
Pin and Signal Information for
Alarm Connectors
Table 3-55 lists the pins and signal names for Alarms A and B.
Table 3-55: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors
ALARM A
Pin
ALARM B
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
A CDO1 NC
31
Cust Retn 4
B CDO9 NC
31
B CDI 22
A CDO1 Com
32
A CDI 4
B CDO9 Com
32
Cust Retn 22
A CDO1 NO
33
Cust Retn 5
B CDO9 NO
33
B CDI 23
A CDO2 NC
34
A CDI 5
B CDO10 NC
34
Cust Retn 23
A CDO2 Com
35
Cust Retn 6
B CDO10 Com
35
B CDI 24
A CDO2 NO
36
A CDI 6
B CDO10 NO
36
Cust Retn 24
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
3-103
DRAFT
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
Table 3-55: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors
ALARM A
Pin
Signal Name
ALARM B
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
Pin
Signal Name
A CDO3 NC
37
Cust Retn 7
B CDO11 NC
37
B CDI 25
A CDO3 Com
38
A CDI 7
B CDO11 Com
38
Cust Retn 25
A CDO3 NO
39
Cust Retn 8
B CDO11 NO
39
B CDI 26
10
A CDO4 NC
40
A CDI 8
10
B CDO12 NC
40
Cust Retn 26
11
A CDO4 Com
41
Cust Retn 9
11
B CDO12 Com
41
B CDI 27
12
A CDO4 NO
42
A CDI 9
12
B CDO12 NO
42
Cust Retn 27
13
A CDO5 NC
43
Cust Retn 10
13
B CDO13 NC
43
B CDI 28
14
A CDO5 Com
44
A CDI 10
14
B CDO13 Com
44
Cust Retn 28
15
A CDO5 NO
45
Cust Retn 11
15
B CDO13 NO
45
B CDI 29
16
A CDO6 NC
46
A CDI 11
16
B CDO14 NC
46
Cust Retn 29
17
A CDO6 Com
47
Cust Retn 12
17
B CDO14 Com
47
B CDI 30
18
A CDO6 NO
48
A CDI 12
18
B CDO14 NO
48
Cust Retn 30
19
A CDO7 NC
49
Cust Retn 13
19
B CDO15 NC
49
B CDI 31
20
A CDO7 Com
50
A CDI 13
20
B CDO15 Com
50
Cust Retn 31
21
A CDO7 NO
51
Cust Retn 14
21
B CDO15 NO
51
B CDI 32
22
A CDO8 NC
52
A CDI 14
22
B CDO16 NC
52
Cust Retn 32
23
A CDO8 Com
53
Cust Retn 15
23
B CDO16 Com
53
B CDI 33
24
A CDO8 NO
54
A CDI 15
24
B CDO16 NO
54
Cust Retn 33
25
Cust Retn 1
55
Cust Retn 16
25
B CDI 19
55
B CDI 34
26
A CDI 1
56
A CDI 16
26
Cust Retn 19
56
Cust Retn 34
27
Cust Retn 2
57
Cust Retn 17
27
B CDI 20
57
B CDI 35
28
A CDI 2
58
A CDI 17
28
Cust Retn 20
58
Cust Retn 35
29
Cust Retn 3
59
Cust Retn 18
29
B CDI 21 (+27 V)
59
B CDI 36
60
Cust Retn 36
Converter Alarm (–48 V)
30
A CDI 3
60
A CDI 18
30
Cust Retn 21 (+27 V)
Converter Retn (–48V)
NOTE
CDO = Customer Defined Output
CDI = Customer Defined Input
3-104
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)
Table of Contents
Mar 2001
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – All–inclusive TX & RX . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Test Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX OUT Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-3
TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
4-5
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tx Mask Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
4-6
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rho Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
4-8
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pilot Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
4-9
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Domain Power Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
4-10
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FER Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
4-12
Generate an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
4-13
4-13
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – All–inclusive TX & RX
Introduction
The Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular Field
Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTS
subsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) and
supported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File (CDF)
assignment.
The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to a
file that can be printed. All tests are controlled from the LMF platform
using the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipment
supported by the LMF can be used.
This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which is
the recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages of
simplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeying
commmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the execution
of complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feel
the command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into the
progress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, refer
to LMF CLI Commands, R15.X (68P09251A59).
IMPORTANT
Before performing any tests, use an editor to view the
“CAVEATS” section of the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf
folder for any applicable information.
The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service (OOS)
sectors only.
DO NOT substitute test equipment not supported by the
LMF.
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set
connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test
set components, if required.
Customer requirements determine which ATP tests to are to be
performed, and the craftsperson selects the appropriate ATP tests to run.
The tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:
 All TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line up.
These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, and CIO cards, the LPAs and
passive components including splitters, combiners, bandpass filters,
and RF cables.
 All RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line up.
These include the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for expansion
frames), CIO, BBX, MCC, and GLI cards and the passive components
including RX filters (starter frame only), and RF cables.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
4-1
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – All–inclusive TX & RX
– continued
 All TX/RX: Executes all the TX and RX tests.
 Full Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads the BLO,
and executes the TX audit before running all of the TX and RX tests.
ATP Test Prerequisites
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following have been
completed:
 BTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).
 LMF is logged into the BTS.
 CSMs, GLIs, BBXs, MCCs, and TSU (if the RFDS is installed) have
correct code load and data load.
 Primary CSM, GLI, and MCCs are INS_ACT.
 BBXs are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded.
 BBXs are OOS_RAM.
 Test cables are calibrated.
 Test equipment is connected for ATP tests (see Figure 3-13 through
Figure 3-16 starting on page 3-50).
 Test equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated.
 GPIB is on.
WARNING
Before performing the FER, be sure that all LPAs are
turned OFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter
ports are properly terminated.
All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP
tests.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily
injury or equipment damage.
TX OUT Connection
IMPORTANT
4-2
Many of the acceptance test procedures require taking
measurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At
sites without RFDS installed, all measurements will be via
the BTS TX OUT connector. At sites with RFDS installed,
all measurements will be via the RFDS directional coupler
TX OUT connector.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – All–inclusive TX & RX – continued
ATP Test Procedure
There are three different ATP testing options that can be performed to
completely test a BTS. Depending on your requirements, one of the
following ATP testing options should be run.
 ATP Testing Option 1
– All TX/RX
 ATP Testing Option 2
– All TX
– All RX
 ATP Testing Option 3
– TX Mask Test
– Rho Test
– Pilot Time Offset Test
– Code Domain Power Test
– FER Test
NOTE
The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX
path calibrated before all the TX and RX tests are run.
IMPORTANT
If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,
remove the manual control/system memory card from the
card slot and set the I/O Config to the Talk & Lstn mode
before starting the automated testing.
Follow the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.
NOTE
The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure
 Step
Action
Select the device(s) to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select the test you want to run.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier
pick list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the  or  key while making the selections.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
4-3
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – All–inclusive TX & RX
– continued
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure
 Step
Action
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
The default channel number displayed is determined by the CdmaChans[n] number in the
cbsc–n.cdf file for the BTS.
Click on the OK button.
The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
The test results are displayed in the status report window.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4-4
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction
Individual Acceptance Tests
The following individual tests can be used to verify the results of
specific tests.
Spectral Purity TX Mask (Primary & Redundant BBX)
This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generated
on each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification with
respect to the assigned CDF file values.
Waveform Quality (rho)
This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital
waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in
ANSI–J_STD–019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual and
perfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents
100% (or perfect correlation).
Pilot Time Offset
The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer
measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the
incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Pilot
Gain = 262, PN Offset = 0).
Code Domain Power (Primary & Redundant BBX)
This test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set for
all ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is
done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to
10.2 $ 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”
Walsh channels measures v –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA
channel power).
Frame Error Rate
The Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entire
CDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to all
respective sector/antennas. This test verifies the BTS sensitivity on all
traffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs at
an RF input level of –119 dBm (or –116 dBm if using TMPC).
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
4-5
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test
Tx Mask Test
This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at a
specific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are
performed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the same
command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT
(BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna, and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using
both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only). BBX power output is set to obtain +40 dBm as
measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS
directional coupler).
NOTE
TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power
level to +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from
pilot gain set to 541.
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the
attenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolution
bandwidth. With respect to the mean power of the CDMA channel
measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth in dB, verify that results meet
system tolerances at the following test points:
 1.7/1.9 GHz:
– at least –45 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency
– at least –45 dB @ – 900 kHz from center frequency
 800 MHz:
–
–
–
–
at least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency
at least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency
at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency
at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency
The BBX then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated.
4-6
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display
Mean CDMA Bandwidth
Power Reference
.5 MHz Span/Div
Ampl 10 dB/Div
Center Frequency
Reference
Attenuation level of all
spurious and IM products
with respect to the mean
power of the CDMA channel
+ 1980 kHz
– 1980 kHz
– 900 kHz
+ 900 kHz
– 750 kHz
Mar 2001
+750 kHz
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
FW00282
DRAFT
4-7
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test
Rho Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveform
quality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the
current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up using
both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to
40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or
RFDS directional coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
channel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that the
result meets system tolerances:
 Waveform quality (rho) should be > 0.912 (–0.4 dB).
The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then be repeated.
4-8
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test
Pilot Offset Acceptance Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset
of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current
CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH elements from
the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using both
bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to
40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or
RFDS directional coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
Time Offset in µs, verifying results meet system tolerances:
 Pilot Time Offset should be within < 3 µs of the target PT
Offset (0 µs).
The BBX then de-keys, and if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
4-9
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
Code Domain Power Test
This test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX carrier
keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.
All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by
the same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT
(BTS/RFDS) connector.
For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262. All MCC
channel elements under test are configured to generate Orthogonal
Channel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes and to be
assigned a full–rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs to
be tested an any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32
CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made; so all channel
elements are verified on all sectors.
BBX power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT
connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).
You verify the code domain power levels, which have been set for all
ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is
done by verifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is
equal to 10.2 + 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channels
measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).
The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated. Upon completion of the test, OCNS
is disabled on the specified MCC/CE.
4-10
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continued
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
MAX OCNS
CHANNEL
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
MIN OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS
CHANNEL
MAX NOISE
FLOOR
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB SPEC.
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
64
Showing all OCNS Passing
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
FAILURE – EXCEEDS
MAX OCNS SPEC.
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE – DOES NOT
MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE – EXCEEDS MAX
NOISE FLOOR SPEC.
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
64
Indicating Failures
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
FW00283
DRAFT
4-11
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test
FER Test
This test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currently
configured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF input
level of –119 dBm [or –116 dBm if using Tower Top
Amplifier (TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibrated
test set as the signal source controlled by the same command. All
measurements are via the LMF.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna, and all channel
elements from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed
up, using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with
pilot channel element only). BBX power output is set to –20 dBm as
measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS
directional coupler). The BBX must be keyed to enable the RX receive
circuitry.
The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcode
and provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverse
link for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying that
results meet the following specification:
 FER returned less than 1% and total frames measured is 1500
All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. The
BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to assign
the applicable redundant BBX to the current RX antenna paths under
test. The test is then repeated.
4-12
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Generate an ATP Report
Background
Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include the
results of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used to
close the status report window. The ATP report is not updated if the
status reports window is closed using the Dismiss button.
ATP Report
Each time an ATP test is run, a separate report is created for each BTS
and includes the following for each test:
Test name
BBX number
Channel number
Carrier number
Sector number
Upper test limit
Lower test limit
Test result
PASS or FAIL
Description information (if applicable)
Time stamp
Details/Warning information (if applicable)
The report can be printed if the LMF computer is connected to a printer.
Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and/or print the ATP
report for a BTS.
Table 4-2: Generating an ATP Report
 Step
Action
Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the desired BTS from the available Base Station pick list.
Click on the Report button.
Click on a column heading to sort the report.
Mar 2001
– If not desiring a printable file copy, click on the Dismiss button.
– If requiring a printable file copy, select the desired file type in the picklist and click on the
Save button.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
4-13
DRAFT
Generate an ATP Report – continued
Notes
4-14
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Chapter 5: Prepare to Leave the Site
Table of Contents
Prepare to Leave the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Test Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset All Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Site Span Configuration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set BTS Site Span Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating CBSC LMF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re–connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem . . . . . . . . . .
Re–establish OMC–R Control/ Verifying T1/E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-6
5-6
5-8
5-8
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Prepare to Leave the Site
External Test Equipment
Removal
Perform the procedure in Table 5-1 to disconnect the test equipment and
configure the BTS for active service.
Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal
Step
Action
Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors on the top of the frame.
Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the top of the frame.
CAUTION
Verify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the
correct ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will
cause system degradation of call processing.
NOTE
Each module or device can be in any state prior to
downloading. Each module or device will be in an
OOS_RAM state after downloading has completed.
– For all LMF commands, information in italics
represents valid ranges for that command field.
– Only those fields requiring an input will be specified.
Default values for other fields will be assumed.
– For more complete command examples (including
system response details), refer to the CDMA LMF
User Guide.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
5-1
DRAFT
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Reset All Devices
Reset all devices by cycling power before leaving the site. The
configuration data and code loads could be different from data and code
on the LMF. By resetting all devices, the CBSC can load the proper data
and code when the span is active again.
Follow the procedure in Table 5-2 as required to bring all processor
modules from the OOS to INS mode.
IMPORTANT
Have the CBSC/MM bring up the site and enable all
devices at the BTS.
Table 5-2: Enabling Devices
 Step
Action
On the LMF, select the device(s) you wish to enable.
NOTE
The MGLI and CSM must be INS before an MCC can be put INS.
Click on Device from the menu bar.
Click on Enable from the Device menu.
A status report window is displayed.
NOTE
If a BBX2 is selected, a Transceiver Parameters window is displayed to collect keying
information.
Do not enable the BBX2.
5-2
Click OK to close the Transceiver Parameters window.
A status report window displays the status of the device.
Click OK to close the status report window.
The selected devices that successfully change to INS change color to green.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Re–connect BTS T1 Spans
and Integrated Frame Modem
Before leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors that
were removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-3
and Figure 5-1 as required.
Table 5-3: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections
Step
Action
Connect the 50–pin TELCO cables to the BTS span I/O board 50–pin TELCO connectors.
If used, connect the dial–up modem RS–232 serial cable to the Site I/O board RS–232 9–pin
sub D connector.
* IMPORTANT
Verify that you connect both SPAN cables (if removed previously), and the Integrated Frame
Modem (IFM) “TELCO” connector.
Figure 5-1: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections
SPAN A CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
50–PIN TELCO
CONNECTORS
REMOVED
SPAN B CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
RS–232 9–PIN SUB D
CONNECTOR SERIAL
PORT FOR EXTERNAL
DIAL UP MODEM
CONNECTION (IF USED)
TOP of Frame
(Site I/O and Span I/O boards)
FW00299
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
5-3
DRAFT
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
BTS Site Span Configuration
Verification
Perform the procedure in Table 5-4 to verify the current Span Framing
Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/SGLI2
boards in all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should be
verified.
Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of the
MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-2).
Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-5 on page 3-11).
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI2/SGLI2 framing format and line
code configuration (in bold type):
span view 
Observe a display similar to the options shown below:
COMMAND ACCEPTED: span view
The parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – Default (0–131
Span B – Default (0–131
Span C – Default (0–131
Span
D – Default
D f lt (0
(0–131
131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
f t
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Oh
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)
Currently, the link is running at the default rate
The actual rate is 0
NOTE
Defaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.
Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.
There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC span configuration requires it.
If the current MGLI2/SGLI2 framing format and line code configuration does not display the correct
choice, proceed to Table 5-5.
5-4
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all remaining GLIs.
Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection
window menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.
Figure 5-2: MGLI2/SGLI2 MMI Port Connection
RS–232 CABLE
FROM LMF COM1
PORT
GLI BOARD
NULL MODEM BOARD
(PART# 8484877P01)
9–PIN TO 9– PIN
RS–232 CABLE
MMI SERIAL PORT
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Á
ÁÁ
Á Á
Á
FW00344
Set BTS Site Span
Configuration
Perform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span Framing
Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/SGLI2
boards in all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must be
configured.
IMPORTANT
Mar 2001
Perform the following procedure ONLY if span
configurations loaded in the MGLI2/GLI2s do not match
those in the OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the
exact configuration data is available. Loading incorrect
span configuration data will render the site inoperable.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
5-5
DRAFT
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
If not already done, connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the
front panel of the MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-2).
Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-5 on page 3-11).
NOTE
5-6
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
If required only, enter the following MMI command for each span line to set the BTS span parameters
to match that of the physical spans a – f run to the site:
span_config     
option#1 = the span to change (a – f)
option#2 = the span type (0 – 8):
0 – E1_1 (HDB3, CCS, CRC–4)
1 – E1_2 (HDB3, CCS)
2 – E1_3 (HDB3, CAS, CRC–4, TS16)
3 – E1_4 (HDB3, CAS, TS16)
4 – T1_1 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, without ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)
5 – T1_2 (B8ZS, DS1 AT&T ESF, 4 to 1 packing, 64K link)
6 – J1_1 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, Japan CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)
7 – J1_2 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, US CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)
8 – T1_3 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, with ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)
option#3 = the link speed (56 or 64) Kbps
option#4 = the span equalization (0 – 7):
0 – T1_6 (T1,J1:long haul)
1 – T1_4 (T1,J1:393–524 feet)
2 – T1_4 (T1,J1:131–262 feet)
3 – E1_75 (E1:75 Ohm)
4 – T1_4 (T1,J1:0–131 feet)
5 – T1_4 (T1,J1:524–655 feet)
6 – T1_4 (T1,J1:262–393 feet)
7 – E1_120 (E1:120 Ohm)
option#5 = the slot that has LAPD channel (0 – 31)
Example for setting span configuration to E1_2, 64 Kbps, E1_120–Ohm, LAPD channel 1:
span_config a 1 64 7 1
span_config f 1 64 7 1
Example for setting span configuration to T1_2, 64 Kbps, T1_4 (0–131 feet), LAPD channel 0:
span_config a 5 64 4 0
span_config f 5 64 4 0
. . . continued on next page
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Make sure that spans a – f are set to the same span type and link speed. The equalization may be
different for each individual span.
After executing the span_config command, the affected MGLI2/SGLI2 board MUST be reset and
re–loaded for changes to take effect.
Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate used at
the site.
Press the RESET button on the GLI2 for changes to take effect.
This completes the site specific BTS Span setup for this GLI. Move the MMI cable to the next SGLI2
and repeat steps 1 and 4 for ALL MGLI2/SGLI2 boards.
Terminate the Hyperterm session and disconnect the LMF from the MGLI/SGLI.
Updating CBSC LMF Files
Updated calibration (CAL) file information must be moved from the
LMF Windows environment back to the CBSC, which resides in a Unix
environment. The procedures that follow detail how to move files from
one environment to the other.
Backup CAL Data to a Diskette
The BLO calibration files should be backed up to a diskette (per BTS).
Follow the procedure in Table 5-6 to copy CAL files from a CDMA
LMF computer to a diskette.
Table 5-6: Backup CAL Data to a Diskette
 Step
Action
Insert a diskette into the LMF A drive.
NOTE
If your diskette has not been formatted, format it using Windows. The diskette must be DOS
formatted before copying any files. Consult your Windows/DOS documentation or on–line help
on how to format diskettes.
Click on the Start button and launch the Windows Explorer program from the Programs menu.
Click on your C: drive.
Double Click on the wlmf folder.
Double Click on the CDMA folder.
Click on the bts–# folder for the calibration file you want to copy.
Drag the BTS–#.cal file to the 3–1/2 floppy (A:) icon on the top left of the screen and release the
mouse button.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you have copied each file desired.
Close the Windows Explorer program by selecting Close from the File menu option.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
5-7
DRAFT
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
LMF Removal
CAUTION
DO NOT power down the LMF without performing the
procedure indicated below. Corrupted/lost data files may
result, and in some cases, the LMF may lock up.
Follow the procedure in Table 5-7 to terminate the LMF session and
remove the terminal.
Table 5-7: LMF Termination and Removal
 Step
Action
From the CDMA window select File>Exit.
From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown.
Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears.
Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.
Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and the GPIB cables as
required for equipment transport.
Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
Follow the procedure in Table 5-8 to copy CAL files from a diskette to
the CBSC.
Table 5-8: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
 Step
Action
Login to the CBSC on the workstation using your account name and password.
NOTE
Enter the information that appears in bold text.
Place your diskette containing CAL file(s) in the CBSC workstation diskette drive.
Type eject –q and press the  key.
Type mount and press the  key.
Verify that floppy/no_name is displayed.
NOTE
If the eject command has been previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a
number. Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.
Enter cd /floppy/no_name and press the  key.
Enter ls –lia and press the  key.
Verify that the bts–#.cal file is on the diskette.
Enter cd and press the  key.
. . . continued on next page
5-8
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Table 5-8: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
 Step
Action
Enter pwd and press the  key.
Verify that you are in your home directory (/home/).
Enter dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.cal and press the  key (where # is the
BTS number).
10
Enter ls –l *.cal and press the  key.
Verify that the CAL file was successfully copied.
11
Type eject and press the  key.
12
Remove the diskette from the workstation.
Re–establish OMC–R Control/
Verifying T1/E1
IMPORTANT
Mar 2001
After all activities at the site have been completed, and
after disconnecting the LMF, place a phone call to the
OMC–R and request the BTS be placed under control of
the OMC–R.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
5-9
DRAFT
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Notes
5-10
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Chapter 6: Basic Troubleshooting
Table of Contents
Mar 2001
Basic Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-1
Troubleshooting: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Log into Cell-Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate to Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-3
Troubleshooting: Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Download CODE to Any Device (card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot ENABLE Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
Troubleshooting: Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Load BLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-7
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform TX Mask Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement .
Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-9
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi–FER Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
6-10
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation .
No GPS Reference Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checksum Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Bad RX Message Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Reference Source Configuration Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-12
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Control Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-14
6-15
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
DC Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX and RX Signal Routing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
6-19
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except
GLI2, CSM, BBX2, MCC24, MCC8E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX2 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCC24/8E LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
6-20
6-20
6-20
6-21
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-25
6-26
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Span Problems (No Control Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27
6-27
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Basic Troubleshooting Overview
Overview
The information in this section addresses some of the scenarios likely to
be encountered by Cellular Field Engineering (CFE) team members.
This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document
for use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basic
troubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform
per the procedure documented in the manual.
Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field
and information gained form experience in Motorola labs and
classrooms.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
6-1
DRAFT
Troubleshooting: Installation
Cannot Log into Cell-Site
Follow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot a login failure.
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures
 Step
Action
If MGLI2 LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI2 by re-seating it. If this
persists, install a known good MGLI2 card in MGLI2 slot and retry. A Red LED may also indicate
no Ethernet termination at top of frame.
Verify that T1 is disconnected (see Table 3-1 on page 3-4).
If T1 is still connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.
Try pinging the MGLI2 (see Table 3-6 on page 3-15).
Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in the front of the BTS (see
Table 3-2 on page 3-5).
Verify the LMF was configured properly (see Preparing the LMF section starting on page 3–6).
Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 [flexible black cable of less than 76 cm (2.5 feet) length].
Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly (see Figure 3-4 on page 3-14).
Verify a T-adapter is not used on the LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primary
port.
Try connecting to the I/O panel (top of frame). Use BNC T-adapters at the LMF port for this
connection.
10
Re-boot the LMF and retry.
11
Re-seat the MGLI2 and retry.
12
Verify IP addresses are configured properly.
Cannot Communicate to
Power Meter
Follow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power meter
communication failure.
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
 Step
Action
Verify the Power Meter is connected to the LMF with a GPIB adapter.
Verify the cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.
Verify the GPIB address of the Power Meter is set to 13.
Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct.
Refer to the Test Equipment setup section for details.
. . . continued on next page
6-2
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
 Step
Action
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be
‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then power-cycle the GPIB Box
and retry.
Verify that the Com1 port is not used by another application.
Verify that the communications analyzer is in Talk&Listen, not Control mode.
Cannot Communicate to
Communications Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communications
analyzer communication failure.
Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure
 Step
Action
Verify the analyzer is connected to the LMF with GPIB adapter.
Verify the cable setup.
Verify the GPIB address is set to 18.
Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct.
Refer to the Test Equipment setup section starting on page 3–34 for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be
‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then power-cycle the GPIB Box
and retry.
Verify that the Com1 port is not used by another application.
If a Hyperterm window is open for MMI, close it.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-3
Troubleshooting: Download
Cannot Download CODE to
Any Device (card)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot a code download
failure.
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure
 Step
Action
Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS.
Verify the LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.
Communication to the MGLI2 must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTS
device.
The MGLI2 must be INS_ACT state (green).
Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.
If the card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure.
Reset the card by re-seating it.
If the LED remains solid red, replace with a card from another slot & retry.
NOTE
The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.
Re-seat the card and try again.
If BBX reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.
If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting the
device and Reset.
Cannot Download DATA to
Any Device (Card)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot a data download
failure.
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure
 Step
6-4
Action
Re-seat the card and repeat code and data load procedure.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Troubleshooting: Download – continued
Cannot ENABLE Device
Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the
OOS_RAM state (yellow) with data downloaded to the device. The color
of the device changes to green once it is enabled.
The three states that devices can be changed to are as follows:
 Enabled (green, INS)
 Disabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)
 Reset (blue, OOS_ROM)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot a device enable
failure.
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure
 Step
Action
Re-seat the card and repeat the code and data load procedure.
If the CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cell
site location and GPS sync.
Ensure the primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.
NOTE
MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.
Verify the 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.
The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests.
If MCCs give “invalid or no system time”, verify the CSM is operable.
Miscellaneous Errors
Perform the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot miscellaneous
failures.
Table 6-7: Miscellaneous Failures
 Step
Action
If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect an
MMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection (see Table 3-5 on page 3-11).
Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window.
The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem.
(Call Field Support for further assistance.)
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-5
Troubleshooting: Calibration
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Failure
Perform the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibration
failure.
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure
 Step
Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section in Chapter 3)
and connection is made to the proper TX port.
Verify the parameters in the bts–#.cdf file are set correctly for the following bands:
For 1900 MHz:
Bandclass=1; Freq_Band=16; SSType=16
For 800 MHz:
Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=8; SSType=8
For 1700 MHz:
Bandclass=4; Freq_Band=128; SSType=16
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).
Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensor
head.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.
Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).
If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and
retry.
Verify the sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Ref
signal.
If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operational, the Meter display will show
“RES”.
6-6
Action
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Troubleshooting: Calibration – continued
Cannot Load BLO
For Load BLO failures see Table 6-7.
Calibration Audit Failure
Follow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration audit
failure.
Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure
 Step
Action
Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section of
Chapter 3).
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensor
head.
Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED).
Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power
Ref signal.
After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.
Click on the BBX(s) and select Device>Download BLO.
Re-try the audit.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.
Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be “ON” (Power and Ready).
If any other LED is continuously “ON”, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and
retry.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-7
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
Cannot Perform TX Mask
Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-10 to troubleshoot a TX mask
measurement failure.
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure
 Step
Action
Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX(s).
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).
Re-set the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot
Time Offset Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a rho or pilot time
offset measurement failure.
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure
 Step
6-8
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file.
Re–load BBX data and repeat the test.
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling the
circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that the GPS
is still phasing (i.e., trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error).
Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press 
and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilized
before going INS and may need to be re-initialized.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Troubleshooting – Transmit ATP – continued
Cannot Perform Code Domain
Power and Noise Floor
Measurement
Perform the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a code domain and
noise floor measurement failure.
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure
 Step
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file.
Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).
Cannot Perform Carrier
Measurement
Perform the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot a carrier
measurement failure.
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure
 Step
Action
Perform the test manually, using the spread CDMA signal.
Verify High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard is warmed up (60 minutes) and properly
connected to test set-up.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-9
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP
Multi–FER Test Failure
Perform the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot a Multi–FER
failure.
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure
 Step
Action
Verify the test equipment set up is correct for an FER test.
Verify the test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks.
On the HP8921A test set, the yellow LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.
Verify the MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS–ACT.
Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure).
Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of
failure).
Verify the antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.
6-10
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist
Problem Description
Many of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) board failures may
be resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for
repair. This section describes known CSM problems identified in field
returns, some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before
returning suspect CSM boards.
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz
Reference Clock/GPS
Receiver Operation
If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or
SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version
“AB”, then replace with version “BC” or higher, and return model “AB”
to the repair center.
No GPS Reference Source
Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. CSM kit
SGLN1145, in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit
SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectly
configured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt to
change hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPS
antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.
Checksum Failure
The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a
non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical
disturbance or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another
download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return the CSM
board back to the repair center if the attempt to reload fails.
GPS Bad RX Message Type
This problem is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM
software (3.5 or higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an
earlier version of CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from
the CBSC. Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher.
Return the CSM board back to the repair center if the attempt to reload
fails.
CSM Reference Source
Configuration Error
This problem is caused by incorrect reference source configuration
performed in the field by software download. CSM kits SGLN1145 and
SGLN4132 must have proper reference sources configured (as shown
below) to function correctly.
CSM Kit
No.
Hardware
Configuration
CSM Slot
No.
Reference Source
Configuration
CDF Value
SGLN1145
With GPS Receiver
Primary = Local GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
2 or 18
SGLN4132
Without GPS Receiver
Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
2 or 18
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
6-11
DRAFT
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist – continued
Takes Too Long for CSM to
Come INS
This problem may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the
accuracy flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system
time/GPS and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least one
satellite should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and four
satellites should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also,
verify correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.
6-12
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
Introduction
The C–CCP backplane is a multi–layer board that interconnects all the
C–CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible
improper diagnoses when problems occur.
Connector Functionality
The following connector overview describes the major types of
backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This
information allows the CFE to:
 Determine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem
type.
 Isolate problems to a specific cable or connector.
Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Inter Shelf Bus Connectors
The 40 pin Inter Shelf Bus (ISB) connectors provide an interface bus
from the master GLI2 to all other GLI2s in the modem frame. Their
basic function is to provide clock synchronization from the master GLI2
to all other GLI2s in the frame.
The ISB also provides the following functions:
 Span line grooming when a single span is used for multiple cages.
 MMI connection to/from the master GLI2 to cell site modem.
 Interface between GLI2s and the AMR (for reporting BTS alarms).
Span Line Connector
The span line input is an 8–pin RJ–45 connector that provides a primary
and secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI2 in the C–CCP
shelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master
GLI2 and also all the BBX traffic.
Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Reference Distribution
Module Input/Output
The Reference Distribution Module (RDM) connectors route the 3 MHz
reference signals from the CSMs to the GLI2s and all BBXs in the
backplane. The signals are used to phase lock loop all clock circuits on
the GLI2s and BBX boards to produce precise clock and signal
frequencies.
Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)
Provides a +27 volt or –48 volt input for use by the power supply
modules.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
6-13
DRAFT
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
Power Supply Module Interface
Each power supply module has a series of three different connectors to
provide the needed inputs/outputs to the C–CCP backplane. These
include a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin
interface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The C–CCP
Power Modules convert +27 or –48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, and
+5.0 Volts to be used by the C–CCP shelf cards. In the –48 V BTS, the
LPA power modules convert –48 Volts to a regulated +27 Volts.
GLI2 Connector
This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a
6–conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors
provide inputs/outputs for the GLI2s in the C–CCP backplane.
GLI2 Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections
These BNC connectors are located on the C–CCP backplane and routed
to the GLI2 board. This interface provides all the control and data
communications between the master GLI2 and the other GLI2, between
gateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.
BBX Connector
Each BBX connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector
and two 6–conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,
digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBXs in the C–CCP backplane.
CIO Connectors
 RX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri–Filters
(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules –
the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) to
the other. The MPC outputs the low–noise–amplified signals via the
C–CCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to
the appropriate BBX.
 A digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX, to the
backplane, then on to the MCC slots.
 Digital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCCs. Each output
is routed from the MCC slot via the backplane appropriate BBX.
 TX RF path signal originates from the BBX, through the backplane to
the CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling to
the LPAs in the LPA shelf.
C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 provide procedures for troubleshooting
problems that appear to be related to a defective C–CCP backplane. The
tables are broken down into possible problems and steps that should be
taken in an attempt to find the root cause.
. . . continued on next page
6-14
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
IMPORTANT
Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 must be completed before
replacing ANY C–CCP backplane.
Digital Control Problems
No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot a GLI2 control via
LMF failure.
Table 6-15: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
 Step
Action
Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (All GLI2s)
Follow the procedures in Table 6-16 and Table 6-17 to troubleshoot
GLI2 control failures.
Table 6-16: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI2s)
Step
Action
Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base.
Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI2 for proper connection and
damage.
Check the span line configuration on the MGLI2 (see Table 5-4 on page 5-4).
Table 6-17: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI2
Step
Action
Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base.
Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
6-15
DRAFT
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
No AMR Control (MGLI2 good)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-18 to troubleshoot an AMR control
failure when the MGLI control is good.
Table 6-18: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR
Step
Action
Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.
No BBX Control in the Shelf – (No Control over Co–located
GLI2s)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-19 to troubleshoot a BBX control in
the shelf failure.
Table 6-19: No BBX Control in the Shelf – No Control over Co–located GLI2s
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Visually check BBX connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.
No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Perform the procedure in Table 6-20 to troubleshoot a span line traffic
failure.
Table 6-20: MGLI2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.
If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX, replace the MGLI2 with a known good MGLI2.
Perform the BTS Span Parameter Configuration ( see Table 5-4 on page 5-4).
Ensure that ISB cabling is correct.
6-16
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
No (or Missing) MCC Channel Elements
Perform the procedure in Table 6-21 to troubleshoot a channel elements
failure.
Table 6-21: No MCC Channel Elements
Step
Action
Verify CEs on a co–located MCC (MCC24 TYPE=2)
If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace the MCC with a known good MCC.
– Check connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
If no CEs on any MCC:
– Verify clock reference to CIO.
Check the CDF for MCCTYPE=2 (MCC24) or MCCTYPE=0 (MCC8).
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
6-17
DRAFT
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
DC Power Problems
Perform the procedure in Table 6-22 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage
to power supply module failure.
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to
the BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a
second person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all
rings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning this
test.
No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Table 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Step
Action
Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame.
Verify there are no breakers tripped.
* IMPORTANT
If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker and
attempt to reset it.
– If the breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.
– If the breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub–assembly within the shelf.
Verify that the C–CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional.
Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C–CCP backplane by
measuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable.
– If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.
– If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the “VCC” power
feed clip on the distribution backplane.
– If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect the clip for damage.
If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supply module connectors.
Replace the power supply module with a known good module.
If steps 1 through 5 fail to indicate a problem, a C–CCP backplane failure (possibly an open trace) has
occurred.
6-18
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI2,
BBX, or Switchboard
Perform the procedure in Table 6-23 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage
to GLI2, BBX, or Switchboard failure.
Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module
Step
Action
Verify the steps in Table 6-22 have been performed.
Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage.
Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.
TX and RX Signal Routing
Problems
Perform the procedure in Table 6-24 to troubleshoot TX and RX signal
routing problems.
Table 6-24: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems
Step
Action
Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back–plane connectors for damage in all the affected board
slots.
Perform steps in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
6-19
DRAFT
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
Module Status Indicators
Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)
LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is
labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.
Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm
(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.
Based on the status of this signal, the AMR controls the state of the
PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.
LED Status Combinations for
All Modules (except GLI2,
CSM, BBX, MCC)
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.
 Solid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
 Solid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware failure.
Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete
module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or
interrupted.
DC/DC Converter LED Status
Combinations
The PWR CNVTR has alarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls the
state of the PWR/ALM LED. This is true for both the C–CCP and LPA
power converters.
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.
 Solid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
 Solid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware problem.
6-20
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
CSM LED Status
Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and
software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.
After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM code from the Flash
EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS–ROM code is loaded
from the Flash EPROM.
 Solid GREEN – module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.
 Solid RED – Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)
condition.
 Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
 Long RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm.
 Rapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm or INS_ACT in
DUMB mode.
Short RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm.
Long GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.
Off – no DC power or on-board fuse is open.
Solid YELLOW – After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During
SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If
SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and
the CSM attempts to reboot.)
Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports
SYNC
MONITOR
PWR/ALM
Indicator
FREQ
MONITOR
FW00303
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
6-21
DRAFT
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
FREQ Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When
both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2
clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.
The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm
(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.
SYNC Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by the
CSMs.
At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse
width of 153 nanoseconds.
MMI Connector – Only accessible behind front panel. The RS–232
MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in the development
or factory environment, but may be used in the field for
debug/maintenance purposes.
6-22
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
GLI2 LED Status
Combinations
The GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as described
below and shown in Figure 6-2.
The operating states of the 5 LEDs are:
ACTIVE
Solid GREEN – GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelf
control and is providing control of the digital interfaces.
Off – GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should be
active.
MASTER
 Solid GREEN – GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).
 Off – GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).
ALARM
 Solid RED – GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.
 While in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 is
performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).
 While in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 is
performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).
 Off – No Alarm.
STATUS
 Flashing GREEN– GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operating
condition.
 On – GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.
 Off – GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.
SPANS
 Solid GREEN – Span line is connected and operating.
 Solid RED – Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
6-23
DRAFT
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
GLI2 Pushbuttons and
Connectors
RESET Pushbutton – Depressing the RESET pushbutton causes a
partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices. The GLI2 is
placed in the OOS_ROM state
MMI Connector – The RS–232MMI port connector is intended to be
used primarily in the development or factory environment but may be
used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.
LAN Connectors (A & B) – The two 10BASE2 Ethernet circuit board
mounted BNC connectors are located on the bottom front edge of the
GLI2; one for each LAN interface, A & B. Ethernet cabling is connected
to tee connectors fastened to these BNC connectors.
Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel
LED
ALARM LED
ALARM
SPANS LED
SPANS
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
MMI
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)
RESET
All functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing and releasing
the switch.
ALARM
OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)
SPANS
OFF - card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby
GREEN - operating normally
YELLOW - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving
a remote alarm indication signal from the far end
RED - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm
state
MASTER
The pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in the
top shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card in
the bottom shelf is in the standby mode.
ON - operating normally in active card
OFF - operating normally in standby card
MASTER
MASTER LED
STATUS
RESET
RESET
PUSHBUTTON
STATUS
STATUS LED
OPERATING STATUS
An RSĆ232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of
115,200 baud communications.
ACTIVE
Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant
card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails
ON - active card operating normally
OFF - standby card operating normally
FW00225
6-24
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
BBX LED Status
Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:
Solid GREEN – INS_ACT no alarm
Solid RED Red – initializing or power-up alarm
Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm
Long RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm
Rapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm
Short RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm
Long GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT alarm
MCC LED Status
Combinations
The MCC module has LED indicators and connectors as described
below (see Figure 6-3). Note that the figure does not show the
connectors as they are concealed by the removable lens.
The LED indicators and their states are as follows:
PWR/ALM LED
 RED – fault on module
ACTIVE LED
Off – module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.
Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
Rapidly Flashing Green – OOS_RAM no alarm.
Solid GREEN – module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs
 Solid RED – module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.
MMI Connectors
 The RS–232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used
in the field for debugging purposes.
 The RJ–11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field
for high data rate debugging purposes.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
6-25
DRAFT
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
Figure 6-3: MCC Front Panel
PWR/ALM
PWR/ALM LED
LED
COLOR
OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup and during failure
ąconditions
An alarm is generated in the event of a failure
PWR/ALM
LENS
(REMOVABLE)
ACTIVE
RED
GREEN
RED
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
OPERATING STATUS
RAPIDLY BLINKING - Card is codeĆloaded but
ąnot enabled
SLOW BLINKING - Card is not codeĆloaded
ON - card is codeĆloaded and enabled
ą(INS_ACTIVE)
ON - fault condition
SLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) - CHI
ąbus inactive on powerĆup
FW00224
LPA Shelf LED Status
Combinations
LPA Module LED
Each LPA module contains a bi–color LED just above the MMI
connector on the front panel of the module. Interpret this LED as
follows:
 GREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal
condition).
 Flashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting an
low input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and
does not constitute a failure.
6-26
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
Span Problems (No Control
Link)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-25 to troubleshoot a control link
failure.
Table 6-25: Troubleshooting Control Link Failure
 Step
Action
Verify the span settings using the span_view command on the active master GLI2 MMI port. If
these are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command. Any alarms conditions
indicate that the span is not operating correctly.
– Try looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the Mobility Manager (MM) and
verify that the looped signal is good.
– Listen for control tone on appropriate timeslot from Base Site and MM.
If no traffic channels in groomed MCCs (or in whole C–CCP shelf) can process calls, verify that
the ISB cabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
6-27
DRAFT
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued
Notes
6-28
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
A
Appendix A: Data Sheets
Appendix Content
Mar 2001
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Optimization Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LFR Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA IM Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification
for 3–Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification
for 6–Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMR Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-14
A-16
A-16
A-17
A-17
Site Serial Number Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C–CCP Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Conversion Shelf (–48 V BTS Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-18
A-18
A-19
A-19
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
A-1
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
A
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
Verification of Test Equipment
Used
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used
Manufacturer
Model
Serial Number
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
A-1
DRAFT
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Site Checklist
Table A-2: Site Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
Deliveries
Per established procedures
Floor Plan
Verified
Inter Frame Cables:
Ethernet
Frame Ground
Power
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
Factory Data:
BBX
Test Panel
RFDS
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
Site Temperature
Dress Covers/Brackets
Comments
Preliminary Operations
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations
OK
Parameter
Specification
Shelf ID Dip Switches
Per site equipage
BBX Jumpers
Verified per procedure
Ethernet LAN verification
Verified per procedure
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-2
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Pre–Power and Initial Power
Tests
Table A-4: Pre–power Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
Pre–power–up tests
Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications
Internal Cables:
ISB (all cages)
CSM (all cages)
Power (all cages)
Ethernet Connectors
LAN A ohms
LAN B ohms
LAN A shield
LAN B shield
Ethernet Boots
Air Impedance Cage (single cage)
installed
Initial power–up tests
Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications:
Comments
verified
verified
verified
verified
verified
isolated
isolated
installed
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
A-3
DRAFT
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
General Optimization
Checklist
Table A-5: Pre–power Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
LEDs
Frame fans
illuminated
operational
LMF to BTS Connection
Preparing the LMF
Log into the LMF PC
Create site specific BTS directory
Create master–bts–cdma directory
Download device loads
Moving/Linking files
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
Ping LAN A
Ping LAN B
per procedure
per procedure
Download/Enable MGLI2s
Download/Enable GLI2s
Set Site Span Configuration
Download CSMs
Download
Enable CSMs
Download/Enable MCCs
Download BBXs
Download TSU (in RFDS)
Program TSU NAM
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
Test Set Calibration
per procedure
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-4
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
GPS Receiver Operation
Table A-6: GPS Receiver Operation
OK
Parameter
Specification
GPS Receiver Control Task State:
tracking satellites
Verify parameter
Initial Position Accuracy:
Verify Estimated
or Surveyed
Current Position:
lat
lon
height
RECORD in ms
and cm also
convert to deg
min sec
Current Position: satellites tracked
Estimated:
(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Surveyed:
(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Verify parameter
as appropriate:
GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution of
Precision
(PDOP or HDOP): (<30)
Verify parameter
Current reference source:
Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
A-5
DRAFT
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
LFR Receiver Operation
Table A-7: LFR Receiver Operation
OK
Parameter
Specification
Station call letters M X Y Z
assignment.
SN ratio is > 8 dB
LFR Task State: 1fr
locked to station xxxx
Verify parameter
Current reference source:
Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments
as specified in site
documentation
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-6
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
LPA IM Reduction
Table A-8: LPA IM Reduction
Parameter
OK
Comments
CARRIER
LPA
Specification
4:1 & 2:1
3–Sector
2:1
6–Sector
Dual BP
3–Sector
Dual BP
6–Sector
1A
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
1B
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
1C
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
1D
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
2A
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
2B
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
2C
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
2D
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
3A
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
3B
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
3C
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
3D
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
4A
C4
C2
No Alarms
4B
C4
C2
No Alarms
4C
C4
C2
No Alarms
4D
C4
C2
No Alarms
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Cx – denotes physical carriers
For applied frequency requirements, see Appendix E.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
A-7
DRAFT
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
LPA Convergence
Table A-9: LPA Convergence
OK
Parameter
LPA # Converged
1A
1B
1C
1D
2A
2B
2C
2D
3A
3B
3C
3D
4A
4B
4C
4D
A-8
Specification
Data
Verify per procedure & upload
convergence data
Verify per procedure & upload
convergence data
Verify per procedure & upload
convergence data
Verify per procedure & upload
convergence data
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
TX Bay Level Offset/Power
Output Verification for
3–Sector Configurations
1–Carrier
2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–4, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–6, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–10, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–12, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibrate
carrier 3
Calibrate
carrier 4
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
A-9
DRAFT
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–4, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–6, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–10, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–12, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 3
Calibration
Audit
carrier 4
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-10
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
2–Carrier Adjacent Channel
Table A-11: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–7, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–9, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–7, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–9, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
A-11
DRAFT
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
3–Carrier Adjacent Channels
4–Carrier Adjacent Channels
Table A-12: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or 4–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–4, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–6, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
BBX–10, ANT–4 =
BBX–3, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–12, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibrate
carrier 3
Calibrate
carrier 4
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
. . . continued on next page
A-12
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Table A-12: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or 4–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–4, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–6, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
BBX–10, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–12, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 3
Calibration
Audit
carrier 4
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
A-13
DRAFT
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
TX Bay Level Offset/Power
Output Verification for
6–Sector Configurations
1–Carrier
2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–4, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–6, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–10, ANT–4 =
BBX–3, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–12, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
. . . continued on next page
A-14
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–4, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–6, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–10, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–12, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
A-15
DRAFT
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Table A-14: BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests
OK
Parameter
Specification
SIF: Misc. alarm tests
Verify per procedure
MGLI2 redundancy test
Verify per procedure
GLI2 redundancy test
Verify per procedure
Power supply/converter
redundancy
Verify per procedure
Misc. alarm tests
Verify per procedure
CSM, GPS, & LFR
redundancy/alarm tests
Verify per procedure
LPA redundancy test
Verify per procedure
Data
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
TX Antenna VSWR
Table A-15: TX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
VSWR –
Antenna 1
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 2
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 3
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 4
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 5
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 6
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-16
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
RX Antenna VSWR
Table A-16: RX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
VSWR –
Antenna 1
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 2
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 3
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 4
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 5
< (1.5 : 1)
VSWR –
Antenna 6
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:_________________________________________________________
AMR Verification
Table A-17: AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification
OK
Parameter
Specification
Verify CDI alarm input
operation (“ALARM A”
(numbers 1 –18)
BTS Relay #XX –
Contact Alarm
Sets/Clears
Verify CDI alarm input
operation (“ALARM B”
(numbers 19 –36)
BTS Relay #XX –
Contact Alarm
Sets/Clears
Data
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
A-17
DRAFT
A
Site Serial Number Check List
Date
Site
C–CCP Shelf
Site I/O A & B
C–CCP Shelf
CSM–1
CSM–2
HSO
CCD–1
CCD–2
AMR–1
AMR–2
MPC–1
MPC–2
Fans 1–3
GLI2–1
GLI2–2
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–3
BBX–4
BBX–5
BBX–6
BBX–7
BBX–8
BBX–9
BBX–10
BBX–11
BBX–12
BBX–r
MCC–1
MCC–2
MCC–3
MCC–4
MCC–5
MCC–6
MCC–7
MCC–8
MCC–9
. . . continued on next page
A-18
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Site Serial Number Check List – continued
MCC–1–10
MCC–11
MCC–1–12
CIO
SWITCH
PS–1
PS–2
PS–3
LPAs
LPA 1A
LPA 1B
LPA 1C
LPA 1D
LPA 2A
LPA 2B
LPA 2C
LPA 2D
LPA 3A
LPA 3B
LPA 3C
LPA 3D
LPA 4A
LPA 4B
LPA 4C
LPA 4D
Power Conversion Shelf
(–48 V BTS Only)
AMR
PS 4
PS 5
PS 6
PS 7
PS 8
PS 9
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
A-19
DRAFT
A
Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List – continued
Notes
A-20
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Appendix B: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information
Appendix Content
Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
B-1
B-1
B-1
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
PN Offset Programming Information
PN Offset Background
All channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHz
CDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walsh
code functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair of
PN sequences unique to each sector.
Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmitted
from the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronize
to the next strongest sector.
The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBXs, where the corresponding
I & Q registers reside.
The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)
basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown of
this information is found in Table B-1.
PN Offset Usage
Only the 14–chip delay is currently in use. It is important to determine
the RF chip delay to be able to test the BTS functionality. This can be
done by ascertaining if the CDF file FineTxAdj value was set to “on”
when the MCC was downloaded with “image data”. The FineTxAdj
value is used to compensate for the processing delay (approximately
20 mS) in the BTS using any type of mobile meeting IS–97
specifications.
If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj has
been set for the 14 chip table.
IMPORTANT
Mar 2001
CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL
or HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If
necessary, convert HEX values in Table B-1 to decimal
before comparing them to cdf file I & Q value assignments.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
B-1
DRAFT
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
17523
32292
4700
14406
14899
17025
14745
2783
5832
12407
31295
7581
18523
29920
25184
26282
30623
15540
23026
20019
4050
1557
30262
18000
20056
12143
17437
17438
5102
9302
17154
5198
4606
24804
17180
10507
10157
23850
31425
4075
10030
16984
14225
26519
27775
30100
7922
14199
17637
23081
5099
23459
32589
17398
26333
4011
2256
18651
1094
21202
13841
31767
18890
30999
22420
20168
12354
11187
11834
10395
28035
27399
22087
2077
13758
11778
3543
7184
2362
25840
12177
10402
1917
17708
10630
6812
14350
10999
25003
2652
19898
2010
25936
28531
11952
31947
25589
11345
28198
13947
8462
9595
(Hex.)
4473
7E24
125C
3846
3A33
4281
3999
0ADF
16C8
3077
7A3F
1D9D
485B
74E0
6260
66AA
779F
3CB4
59F2
4E33
0FD2
0615
7636
4650
4E58
2F6F
441D
441E
13EE
2456
4302
144E
11FE
60E4
431C
290B
27AD
5D2A
7AC1
0FEB
272E
4258
3791
6797
6C7F
7594
1EF2
3777
44E5
5A29
13EB
5BA3
7F4D
43F6
66DD
0FAB
08D0
48DB
0446
52D2
3611
7C17
49CA
7917
5794
4EC8
3042
2BB3
2E3A
289B
6D83
6B07
5647
081D
35BE
2E02
0DD7
1C10
093A
64F0
2F91
28A2
077D
452C
2986
1A9C
380E
2AF7
61AB
0A5C
4DBA
07DA
6550
6F73
2EB0
7CCB
63F5
2C51
6E26
367B
210E
257B
. . . continued on next page
B-2
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
32743
7114
7699
19339
28212
29587
19715
14901
20160
22249
26582
7153
15127
15274
23149
16340
27052
13519
10620
15978
27966
12479
1536
3199
4549
17888
13117
7506
27626
31109
29755
26711
20397
18608
7391
23168
23466
15932
25798
28134
28024
6335
21508
26338
17186
22462
3908
25390
27891
9620
4670
14672
29415
20610
6479
10957
18426
22726
5247
29953
5796
16829
4528
5415
10294
17046
7846
10762
13814
16854
795
9774
24291
3172
2229
21283
16905
7062
7532
25575
14244
28053
30408
5094
16222
7159
174
25530
2320
23113
23985
2604
1826
30853
15699
2589
25000
18163
12555
8670
(Hex.)
7FE7
1BCA
1E13
4B8B
6E34
7393
4D03
3A35
4EC0
56E9
67D6
1BF1
3B17
3BAA
5A6D
3FD4
69AC
34CF
297C
3E6A
6D3E
30BF
0600
0C7F
11C5
45E0
333D
1D52
6BEA
7985
743B
6857
4FAD
48B0
1CDF
5A80
5BAA
3E3C
64C6
6DE6
6D78
18BF
5404
66E2
4322
57BE
0F44
632E
6CF3
2594
123E
3950
72E7
5082
194F
2ACD
47FA
58C6
147F
7501
16A4
41BD
11B0
1527
2836
4296
1EA6
2A0A
35F6
41D6
031B
262E
5EE3
0C64
08B5
5323
4209
1B96
1D6C
63E7
37A4
6D95
76C8
13E6
3F5E
1BF7
00AE
63BA
0910
5A49
5DB1
0A2C
0722
7885
3D53
0A1D
61A8
46F3
310B
21DE
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
B-3
DRAFT
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
6491
16876
17034
32405
27417
8382
5624
1424
13034
15682
27101
8521
30232
6429
27116
4238
5128
14846
13024
10625
31724
13811
24915
1213
2290
31551
12088
7722
27312
23130
594
25804
31013
32585
3077
17231
31554
8764
15375
13428
17658
13475
22095
24805
4307
23292
1377
28654
6350
16770
1290
4407
1163
12215
7253
8978
25547
3130
31406
6222
20340
25094
23380
10926
22821
31634
4403
689
27045
27557
16307
22338
27550
22096
23136
12199
1213
936
6272
32446
13555
8789
24821
21068
31891
5321
551
12115
4902
1991
14404
17982
19566
2970
23055
15158
29094
653
19155
23588
(Hex.)
195B
41EC
428A
7E95
6B19
20BE
15F8
0590
32EA
3D42
69DD
2149
7618
191D
69EC
108E
1408
39FE
32E0
2981
7BEC
35F3
6153
04BD
08F2
7B3F
2F38
1E2A
6AB0
5A5A
0252
64CC
7925
7F49
0C05
434F
7B42
223C
3C0F
3474
44FA
34A3
564F
60E5
10D3
5AFC
0561
6FEE
18CE
4182
050A
1137
048B
2FB7
1C55
2312
63CB
0C3A
7AAE
184E
4F74
6206
5B54
2AAE
5925
7B92
1133
02B1
69A5
6BA5
3FB3
5742
6B9E
5650
5A60
2FA7
04BD
03A8
1880
7EBE
34F3
2255
60F5
524C
7C93
14C9
0227
2F53
1326
07C7
3844
463E
4C6E
0B9A
5A0F
3B36
71A6
028D
4AD3
5C24
. . . continued on next page
B-4
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
14726
25685
21356
12149
28966
22898
1713
30010
2365
27179
29740
5665
23671
1680
25861
25712
19245
26887
30897
11496
1278
31555
29171
20472
5816
30270
22188
6182
32333
14046
15873
19843
29367
13352
22977
31691
10637
25454
18610
6368
7887
7730
23476
889
21141
20520
21669
15967
21639
31120
10878
31060
30875
11496
24545
9586
20984
30389
7298
18934
23137
24597
23301
7764
14518
21634
11546
26454
15938
9050
3103
758
16528
20375
10208
17698
8405
28634
1951
20344
26696
3355
11975
31942
9737
9638
30643
13230
22185
2055
8767
15852
16125
6074
31245
15880
20371
8666
816
22309
(Hex.)
3986
6455
536C
2F75
7126
5972
06B1
753A
093D
6A2B
742C
1621
5C77
0690
6505
6470
4B2D
6907
78B1
2CE8
04FE
7B43
71F3
4FF8
16B8
763E
56AC
1826
7E4D
36DE
3E01
4D83
72B7
3428
59C1
7BCB
298D
636E
48B2
18E0
1ECF
1E32
5BB4
0379
5295
5028
54A5
3E5F
5487
7990
2A7E
7954
789B
2CE8
5FE1
2572
51F8
76B5
1C82
49F6
5A61
6015
5B05
1E54
38B6
5482
2D1A
6756
3E42
235A
0C1F
02F6
4090
4F97
27E0
4522
20D5
6FDA
079F
4F78
6848
0D1B
2EC7
7CC6
2609
25A6
77B3
33AE
56A9
0807
223F
3DEC
3EFD
17BA
7A0D
3E08
4F93
21DA
0330
5725
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
B-5
DRAFT
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
3698
16322
17429
21730
17808
30068
12737
28241
20371
13829
13366
25732
19864
5187
23219
28242
6243
445
21346
13256
18472
25945
31051
1093
5829
31546
29833
18146
24813
47
3202
21571
7469
25297
8175
28519
4991
7907
17728
14415
30976
26376
19063
19160
3800
8307
12918
19642
24873
22071
29563
13078
10460
17590
20277
19988
6781
32501
6024
20520
31951
26063
27203
6614
10970
5511
17119
16064
31614
4660
13881
16819
6371
24673
6055
10009
5957
11597
22155
15050
16450
27899
2016
17153
15849
30581
3600
4097
671
20774
24471
27341
19388
25278
9505
26143
13359
2154
13747
27646
(Hex.)
0E72
3FC2
4415
54E2
4590
7574
31C1
6E51
4F93
3605
3436
6484
4D98
1443
5AB3
6E52
1863
01BD
5362
33C8
4828
6559
794B
0445
16C5
7B3A
7489
46E2
60ED
002F
0C82
5443
1D2D
62D1
1FEF
6F67
137F
1EE3
4540
384F
7900
6708
4A77
4AD8
0ED8
2073
3276
4CBA
6129
5637
737B
3316
28DC
44B6
4F35
4E14
1A7D
7EF5
1788
5028
7CCF
65CF
6A43
19D6
2ADA
1587
42DF
3EC0
7B7E
1234
3639
41B3
18E3
6061
17A7
2719
1745
2D4D
568B
3ACA
4042
6CFB
07E0
4301
3DE9
7775
0E10
1001
029F
5126
5F97
6ACD
4BBC
62BE
2521
661F
342F
086A
35B3
6BFE
. . . continued on next page
B-6
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
13904
27198
3685
16820
22479
6850
15434
19332
8518
14698
21476
30475
23984
1912
26735
15705
3881
20434
16779
31413
16860
8322
28530
26934
18806
20216
9245
8271
18684
8220
6837
9613
31632
27448
12417
30901
9366
12225
21458
6466
8999
26718
3230
27961
28465
6791
17338
11832
11407
15553
1056
1413
3311
4951
749
6307
961
2358
28350
31198
11467
8862
6327
7443
28574
25093
6139
22047
32545
7112
28535
10378
15065
5125
12528
23215
20959
3568
26453
29421
24555
10779
25260
16084
26028
29852
14978
12182
25143
15838
5336
21885
20561
30097
21877
23589
26060
9964
25959
3294
(Hex.)
3650
6A3E
0E65
41B4
57CF
1AC2
3C4A
4B84
2146
396A
53E4
770B
5DB0
0778
686F
3D59
0F29
4FD2
418B
7AB5
41DC
2082
6F72
6936
4976
4EF8
241D
204F
48FC
201C
1AB5
258D
7B90
6B38
3081
78B5
2496
2FC1
53D2
1942
2327
685E
0C9E
6D39
6F31
1A87
43BA
2E38
2C8F
3CC1
0420
0585
0CEF
1357
02ED
18A3
03C1
0936
6EBE
79DE
2CCB
229E
18B7
1D13
6F9E
6205
17FB
561F
7F21
1BC8
6F77
288A
3AD9
1405
30F0
5AAF
51DF
0DF0
6755
72ED
5FEB
2A1B
62AC
3ED4
65AC
749C
3A82
2F96
6237
3DDE
14D8
557D
5051
7591
5575
5C25
65CC
26EC
6567
0CDE
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
B-7
DRAFT
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
17418
14952
52
27254
15064
10942
377
14303
24427
26629
20011
16086
24374
9969
29364
25560
28281
7327
32449
26334
14760
15128
29912
4244
8499
9362
10175
30957
12755
19350
1153
29304
6041
21668
28048
10096
23388
15542
24013
2684
19018
25501
4489
31011
29448
25461
11846
30331
10588
32154
30173
15515
5371
10242
28052
14714
19550
8866
15297
10898
31315
19475
1278
11431
31392
4381
14898
23959
16091
9037
24162
6383
27183
16872
9072
12966
28886
25118
20424
6729
20983
12372
13948
27547
8152
17354
17835
14378
7453
26317
5955
10346
13200
30402
7311
3082
21398
31104
24272
27123
(Hex.)
440A
3A68
0034
6A76
3AD8
2ABE
0179
37DF
5F6B
6805
4E2B
3ED6
5F36
26F1
72B4
63D8
6E79
1C9F
7EC1
66DE
39A8
3B18
74D8
1094
2133
2492
27BF
78ED
31D3
4B96
0481
7278
1799
54A4
6D90
2770
5B5C
3CB6
5DCD
0A7C
4A4A
639D
1189
7923
7308
6375
2E46
767B
295C
7D9A
75DD
3C9B
14FB
2802
6D94
397A
4C5E
22A2
3BC1
2A92
7A53
4C13
04FE
2CA7
7AA0
111D
3A32
5D97
3EDB
234D
5E62
18EF
6A2F
41E8
2370
32A6
70D6
621E
4FC8
1A49
51F7
3054
367C
6B9B
1FD8
43CA
45AB
382A
1D1D
66CD
1743
286A
3390
76C2
1C8F
0C0A
5396
7980
5ED0
69F3
. . . continued on next page
B-8
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
29572
13173
10735
224
12083
22822
2934
27692
10205
7011
22098
2640
4408
102
27632
19646
26967
32008
7873
655
25274
16210
11631
8535
19293
12110
21538
10579
13032
14717
11666
25809
5008
32418
22175
11742
22546
21413
133
4915
8736
1397
18024
15532
26870
5904
24341
13041
23478
1862
5578
25731
10662
11084
31098
16408
6362
2719
14732
22744
1476
8445
21118
22198
22030
10363
25802
2496
31288
24248
14327
23154
13394
1806
17179
10856
25755
15674
7083
29096
3038
16277
25525
20465
28855
32732
20373
9469
26155
6957
12214
21479
31914
32311
11276
20626
423
2679
15537
10818
(Hex.)
7384
3375
29EF
00E0
2F33
5926
0B76
6C2C
27DD
1B63
5652
0A50
1138
0066
6BF0
4CBE
6957
7D08
1EC1
028F
62BA
3F52
2D6F
2157
4B5D
2F4E
5422
2953
32E8
397D
2D92
64D1
1390
7EA2
569F
2DDE
5812
53A5
0085
1333
2220
0575
4668
3CAC
68F6
1710
5F15
32F1
5BB6
0746
15CA
6483
29A6
2B4C
797A
4018
18DA
0A9F
398C
58D8
05C4
20FD
527E
56B6
560E
287B
64CA
09C0
7A38
5EB8
37F7
5A72
3452
070E
431B
2A68
649B
3D3A
1BAB
71A8
0BDE
3F95
63B5
4FF1
70B7
7FDC
4F95
24FD
662B
1B2D
2FB6
53E7
7CAA
7E37
2C0C
5092
01A7
0A77
3CB1
2A42
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
B-9
DRAFT
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
5850
5552
12589
23008
27636
17600
17000
21913
30320
28240
7260
17906
5882
22080
12183
23082
17435
18527
31902
18783
20027
7982
20587
10004
13459
13383
28930
4860
13108
24161
20067
2667
13372
28743
24489
249
19960
29682
31101
27148
26706
5148
4216
5762
245
21882
3763
206
28798
32402
23074
20250
14629
29175
13943
11072
29492
5719
7347
12156
25623
27725
28870
31478
28530
24834
9075
32265
3175
17434
12178
25613
31692
25384
18908
25816
4661
31115
7691
1311
16471
15771
16112
21062
29690
10141
19014
22141
11852
26404
30663
32524
28644
10228
23536
18045
25441
27066
13740
13815
(Hex.)
16DA
15B0
312D
59E0
6BF4
44C0
4268
5599
7670
6E50
1C5C
45F2
16FA
5640
2F97
5A2A
441B
485F
7C9E
495F
4E3B
1F2E
506B
2714
3493
3447
7102
12FC
3334
5E61
4E63
0A6B
343C
7047
5FA9
00F9
4DF8
73F2
797D
6A0C
6852
141C
1078
1682
00F5
557A
0EB3
00CE
707E
7E92
5A22
4F1A
3925
71F7
3677
2B40
7334
1657
1CB3
2F7C
6417
6C4D
70C6
7AF6
6F72
6102
2373
7E09
0C67
441A
2F92
640D
7BCC
6328
49DC
64D8
1235
798B
1E0B
051F
4057
3D9B
3EF0
5246
73FA
279D
4A46
567D
2E4C
6724
77C7
7F0C
6FE4
27F4
5BF0
467D
6361
69BA
35AC
35F7
. . . continued on next page
B-10
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
13463
15417
23101
14957
23429
12990
12421
28875
4009
1872
15203
30109
24001
4862
14091
6702
3067
28643
21379
20276
25337
19683
10147
16791
17359
13248
22740
13095
10345
30342
27866
9559
8808
12744
11618
27162
17899
29745
31892
23964
23562
2964
18208
15028
21901
24566
18994
13608
27492
11706
3684
23715
15314
32469
9816
4444
5664
7358
27264
28128
30168
29971
3409
16910
20739
10191
12819
19295
10072
15191
27748
720
29799
27640
263
24734
16615
20378
25116
19669
14656
27151
28728
25092
22601
2471
25309
15358
17739
12643
32730
19122
16870
10787
18400
20295
1937
17963
7438
12938
(Hex.)
3497
3C39
5A3D
3A6D
5B85
32BE
3085
70CB
0FA9
0750
3B63
759D
5DC1
12FE
370B
1A2E
0BFB
6FE3
5383
4F34
62F9
4CE3
27A3
4197
43CF
33C0
58D4
3327
2869
7686
6CDA
2557
2268
31C8
2D62
6A1A
45EB
7431
7C94
5D9C
5C0A
0B94
4720
3AB4
558D
5FF6
4A32
3528
6B64
2DBA
0E64
5CA3
3BD2
7ED5
2658
115C
1620
1CBE
6A80
6DE0
75D8
7513
0D51
420E
5103
27CF
3213
4B5F
2758
3B57
6C64
02D0
7467
6BF8
0107
609E
40E7
4F9A
621C
4CD5
3940
6A0F
7038
6204
5849
09A7
62DD
3BFE
454B
3163
7FDA
4AB2
41E6
2A23
47E0
4F47
0791
462B
1D0E
328A
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
B-11
DRAFT
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
B-12
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
14301
23380
11338
2995
23390
14473
6530
20452
12226
1058
12026
19272
29989
8526
18139
3247
28919
7292
20740
27994
2224
6827
(Hex.)
37DD
5B54
2C4A
0BB3
5B5E
3889
1982
4FE4
2FC2
0422
2EFA
4B48
7525
214E
46DB
0CAF
70F7
1C7C
5104
6D5A
08B0
1AAB
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Appendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Appendix Content
Appendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
C-1
C-1
C-2
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Usage & Background
Periodic maintenance of a site may also may mandate re–optimization of
specific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines is
included in the following tables.
IMPORTANT
Re–optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in
the tables below must be performed anytime an RF cable
associated with it is replaced.
BTS Frame
Table C-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS
Item Replaced
Optimize:
C–CCP Shelf
All sector TX and RX paths to all
Combined CDMA Channel Processor
(C–CCP) shelves.
Multicoupler/
Preselector Card
The three or six affected sector RX paths for
the C–CCP shelf in the BTS frames.
Preselector I/O
All sector RX paths.
BBX board
RX and TX paths of the affected C–CCP
shelf / BBX board.
CIO Card
All RX and TX paths of the affected
CDMA carrier.
Any LPA Module
The affected sector TX path.
LPA Backplane
The affected sector TX path.
LPA Filter
The affected sector TX path.
Ancillary Frame
Item Replaced
Optimize:
Directional Coupler
All affected sector RX and TX paths to all
BTS frame shelves.
Site filter
All affected RX sector paths in all shelves
in all BTS frames.
Any RFDS component
or TSU.
The RFDS calibration RX & TX paths
(MONFWD/GENFWD).
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
C-1
DRAFT
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
Inter-frame Cabling
Optimization must be performed after the replacement of any RF cabling
between BTS frames.
Table C-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling
Item Replaced
Optimize:
Ancillary frame to BTS
frame (RX) cables
The affected sector/antenna RX
paths.
BTS frame to ancillary frame
(TX) cables
The affected sector/antenna TX paths.
Detailed Optimization/ATP
Test Matrix
Table C-3 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to be
performed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. It
is also assumed that all modules are placed OOS–ROM via the LMF
until full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.
The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.
IMPORTANT
Not every procedure required to bring the site back on line
is indicated in Table C-3. It is meant to be used as a
guideline ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar
enough with the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to
understand which test equipment set ups, calibrations, and
BTS site preparation will be required before performing the
Table # procedures referenced.
Various passive BTS components (such as the TX and RX directional
couplers, Preselector IO, CIO; etc.) only call for a TX or RX calibration
audit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If the RX or TX
path calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration will need to be
repeated. If the RF path calibration fails, further troubleshooting is
warranted.
Whenever any C–CCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that
only power to the C–CCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the
breaker supplying that shelf.
Whenever any DISTRIBUTION BACKPLANE is replaced it is assumed
that the power to the entire RFM frame is removed and the Preselector
I/O is replaced. The modem frame should be brought up as if it were a
new installation.
. . . continued on next page
C-2
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
NOTE
If any significant change in signal level results from any
component being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow
paths, it would be identified by re–running the RX and TX
calibration audit command.
When the CIO is replaced, the C–CCP shelf remains powered up. The
BBX boards may need to be removed, then re–installed into their
original slots, and re–downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TX
calibration audits should then be performed.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
C-3
DRAFT
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
Download/Enable
LPA Backplane
LPA Combiner Filter 4:1
LPA Combiner Filter 2:1
SWITCH CARD
Power Converters (See Note)
LPA Filter Bandpass
GLI2
GPS
LPA
LFR/HSO
3-15 Ping the Processors
CSM
Table 3-6
MCC24/MCC8E
2-5 DC Power Pre-Test
2-13 Physical Inspect
2-14 Initial Power-up
BBX2
Table 2-2
Table 2-5
Table 2-7
C–CCP Backplane
2-2
CIO
Table 2-1
Multicoupler/Preselector
Initial Boards/Modules
Install, Preliminary
Operations, CDF Site
Equipage; etc.
TX Cables
page
RX Cables
Description
RX Filter
Doc
Tbl
Directional Coupler (TX)
Directional Coupler (RX)
Table C-3: SC 4812T BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
Table 3-12 3-28 MGLI2s
Table 3-12 3-28 Download/Enable GLIs
Table 3-13 3-29 Download CSMs
Table 3-13 3-29 Download MCCs,
Table 3-13 3-29 Download BBXs
Table 3-15 3-31 Enable CSMs
Table 3-16 3-32 Enable MCCs
GPS Initialization /
LFR Initialization /
Table 3-19 3-37 Verification
Table 3-20 3-41 Verification
HSO
Table 3-21 3-43 Initialization/Verification
Table 3-34 3-70 TX Path Calibration
Table 3-35 3-71 Download Offsets to BBX
Table 3-36 3-73 TX Path Calibration Audit
Table 4-1
4-3
Spectral Purity TX Mask
ATP
Table 4-1
4-3
Waveform Quality (rho)
ATP
Table 4-1
4-3
Pilot Time Offset ATP
Table 4-1
4-3
Code Domain Power /
Noise Floor
Table 4-1
4-3
FER Test
NOTE
Replace power converters one card at a time so that power to the C–CCP or LPA shelf is not lost. If power to
the C–CCP shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.
C-4
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Appendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
Appendix Content
Appendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations . . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
D-1
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
Usage & Background
Table D-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domain
channel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and the
BBX Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant RF
output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the table.
The table assumes that the BBX Bay Level Offset (BLO) values have
been calculated.
As an illustration, consider a BBX keyed up to produce a CDMA carrier
with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled). Pilot gain
is set to 262. In this case, the BBX Gain Set Point is shown to correlate
exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44 dBm output
range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).
Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm
Gain
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
541
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
533
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
525
–
–
–
–
–
–
44
43
42
41
40
39
517
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.9
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
509
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.8
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
501
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
493
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
485
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
477
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
469
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
461
–
–
–
–
–
43.9
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
453
–
–
–
–
–
43.8
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
445
–
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
437
–
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
429
–
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
421
–
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
413
–
–
–
–
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
405
–
–
–
–
43.8
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
397
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
389
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
D-1
DRAFT
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations – continued
Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm
Gain
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
381
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
374
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
366
–
–
–
43.9
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
358
–
–
–
43.7
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
350
–
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
342
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
334
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
35.1
326
–
–
43.9
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
318
–
–
43.7
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
310
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
302
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
294
–
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
286
–
43.8
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
35.8
34.8
33.8
278
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
33.5
270
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
34.3
33.3
262
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
254
43.7
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
33.7
–
246
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
35.4
34.4
33.4
–
238
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
–
230
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
33.9
–
–
222
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
35.6
34.6
33.6
–
–
214
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
–
–
D-2
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Appendix E: CDMA Operating Frequency Information
Appendix Content
Mar 2001
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North
American PCS Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1900 MHz PCS Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
800 MHz CDMA Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-2
E-4
E-4
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – Korean Bands . . . .
1700 MHz PCS Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 1700 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-6
E-6
E-7
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
PCS Bands
Introduction
Programming of each of the BTS BBX synthesizers is performed by the
BTS GLIs via the CHI bus. This programming data determines the
transmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) for
each BBX.
1900 MHz PCS Channels
Figure E-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS
1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
Figure E-1: North American PCS 1900 MHz Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)
FREQ (MHz)
RX
TX
1851.25 1931.25
CHANNEL
25
275
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1863.75
1943.75
1871.25
1951.25
1883.75
1963.75
1896.25
1976.25
1908.75
1988.75
425
675
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
925
1175
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
E-1
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
Calculating 1900 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table E-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
 TX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 1930 + 0.05*262 = 1943.10 MHz
 RX = TX – 80
Example: Channel 262
RX = 1943.10 – 80 = 1863.10 MHz
Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequency
plan.
Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The
actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band on
both sides of the carrier.
Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier and
the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).
Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
25
0019
1931.25
1851.25
50
0032
1932.50
1852.50
75
004B
1933.75
1853.75
100
0064
1935.00
1855.00
125
007D
1936.25
1856.25
150
0096
1937.50
1857.50
175
00AF
1938.75
1858.75
200
00C8
1940.00
1860.00
225
00E1
1941.25
1861.25
250
00FA
1942.50
1862.50
275
0113
1943.75
1863.75
300
012C
1945.00
1865.00
325
0145
1946.25
1866.25
350
015E
1947.50
1867.50
375
0177
1948.75
1868.75
400
0190
1950.00
1870.00
425
01A9
1951.25
1871.25
450
01C2
1952.50
1872.50
475
01DB
1953.75
1873.75
500
01F4
1955.00
1875.00
. . . continued on next page
E-2
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
525
020D
1956.25
1876.25
550
0226
1957.50
1877.50
575
023F
1958.75
1878.75
600
0258
1960.00
1880.00
625
0271
1961.25
1881.25
650
028A
1962.50
1882.50
675
02A3
1963.75
1883.75
700
02BC
1965.00
1885.00
725
02D5
1966.25
1886.25
750
02EE
1967.50
1887.50
775
0307
1968.75
1888.75
800
0320
1970.00
1890.00
825
0339
1971.25
1891.25
850
0352
1972.50
1892.50
875
036B
1973.75
1893.75
900
0384
1975.00
1895.00
925
039D
1976.25
1896.25
950
03B6
1977.50
1897.50
975
03CF
1978.75
1898.75
1000
03E8
1980.00
1900.00
1025
0401
1981.25
1901.25
1050
041A
1982.50
1902.50
1075
0433
1983.75
1903.75
1100
044C
1985.00
1905.00
1125
0465
1986.25
1906.25
1150
047E
1987.50
1807.50
1175
0497
1988.75
1908.75
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
E-3
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
800 MHz CDMA Channels
Figure E-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellular
telephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
893.970
848.970
799
891.480
891.510
846.480
846.510
694
689
777
889.980
890.010
844.980
845.010
666
667
644
356
739
879.990
880.020
834.990
835.020
333
334
311
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
CDMA NON–WIRELINE (A) BAND
OVERALL NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDS
716
717
870.000
870.030
825.000
825.030
824.040
CHANNEL
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ËËË
ËËË
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ËËË
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ËËË
ËËË
ËËË ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ËË
1023
869.040
RX FREQ
(MHz)
1013
TX FREQ
(MHz)
991
Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)
OVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS
CDMA WIRELINE (B) BAND
FW00402
Calculating 800 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table E-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
 Channels 1–777
TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHz
 Channels 1013–1023
TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)
Example: Channel 1015
TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 – 1023) = 869.76 MHz
 RX = TX – 45 MHz
Example: Channel 262
RX = 877.86 –45 = 832.86 MHz
Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
E-4
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
825.0300
0001
870.0300
25
0019
870.7500
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
825.7500
. . . continued on next page
DRAFT
Mar 2001
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
50
0032
871.5000
826.5000
75
004B
872.2500
827.2500
100
0064
873.0000
828.0000
125
007D
873.7500
828.7500
150
0096
874.5000
829.5000
175
00AF
875.2500
830.2500
200
00C8
876.0000
831.0000
225
00E1
876.7500
831.7500
250
00FA
877.5000
832.5000
275
0113
878.2500
833.2500
300
012C
879.0000
834.0000
325
0145
879.7500
834.7500
350
015E
880.5000
835.5000
375
0177
881.2500
836.2500
400
0190
882.0000
837.0000
425
01A9
882.7500
837.7500
450
01C2
883.5000
838.5000
475
01DB
884.2500
839.2500
500
01F4
885.0000
840.0000
525
020D
885.7500
840.7500
550
0226
886.5000
841.5000
575
023F
887.2500
842.2500
600
0258
888.0000
843.0000
625
0271
888.7500
843.7500
650
028A
889.5000
844.5000
675
02A3
890.2500
845.2500
700
02BC
891.0000
846.0000
725
02D5
891.7500
846.7500
750
02EE
892.5000
847.5000
775
0307
893.2500
848.2500
Channel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.
1013
03F5
869.7000
824.7000
NOTE
1023
Mar 2001
03FF
870.0000
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
825.0000
DRAFT
E-5
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – Korean Bands
1700 MHz PCS Channels
Figure E-3 shows the valid channels for the 1700 MHz PCS frequency
spectrum. The CDMA channels are spaced in increments of 25 (25, 50,
75, . . . 575) across the CDMA band.
Figure E-3: 1700 MHz PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)
CHANNEL
25
FREQ (MHz)
RX
TX
1751.25 1841.25
575
1778.75
1868.75
. . . continued on next page
E-6
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – Korean
Bands – continued
Calculating 1700 MHz Center
Frequencies
Center frequency for channels may be calculated as follows:
Direction
Formula
Example
TX
1840 + (0.05 * Channel#)
Channel: 1840 + (0.05 + 25) = 1841.25
RX
1750 + (0.05 * Channel#)
Channel: 1750 + (0.05 + 25) = 1751.25
– Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system
frequency plan.
– Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The
actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard
band on both sides of the carrier
– Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA
carrier and the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center to
center).
Table E-3: 1700 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel (Korean Bands)
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
0019
1841.25
1751.25
50
0032
1842.50
1752.50
75
004B
1843.75
1753.75
100
0064
1845.00
1755.00
125
007D
1846.25
1756.25
150
0096
1847.50
1757.50
175
00AF
1848.75
1758.75
200
00C8
1850.00
1760.00
225
00E1
1851.25
1761.25
250
00FA
1852.50
1762.50
275
0113
1853.75
1763.75
300
012C
1855.00
1765.00
325
0145
1856.25
1766.25
350
015E
1857.50
1767.50
375
0177
1858.75
1768.75
400
0190
1860.00
1770.00
425
01A9
1861.25
1771.25
450
01C2
1862.50
1772.50
475
01DB
1863.75
1773.75
500
01F4
1865.00
1775.00
525
020D
1866.25
1776.25
550
0226
1867.50
1777.50
575
023F
1868.75
1778.75
25
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
E-7
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – Korean PCS
Bands – continued
Notes
E-8
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Appendix F: PCS Interface Setup for Manual Testing
Appendix Content
Test Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A System Connectivity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Cable Calibration using HP8921 with HP PCS
Interface (HP83236) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
F-1
F-1
F-2
F-2
F-3
F-7
F-8
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Test Equipment Setup
Purpose
This section covers other test equipment and peripherals not covered in
Chapter 3. Procedures for the manual testing are covered here, along
with procedures to calibrate the TX and RX cables using the signal
generator and spectrum analyzer.
Equipment Warm up
IMPORTANT
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes
prior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. This
assures BTS site stability and contributes to optimization
accuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up, hardware/
firmware audit, and BTS download counts as warm-up
time.)
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter)
has been replaced, re-calibration must be performed.
Failure to do so could introduce measurement errors,
resulting in incorrect measurements and degradation to
system performance.
IMPORTANT
Mar 2001
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment
after it has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
F-1
DRAFT
Test Equipment Setup
– continued
Prerequisites
Prior to performing any of these procedures, all preparations for
preparing the LMF, updating LMF files, and any other pre-calibration
procedures, as stated in Chapter 3, must have been completed.
HP8921A System Connectivity
Test
Follow the steps in Table F-1 to verify that the connections between the
PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct, and cables are intact. The
software also performs basic functionality checks of each instrument.
IMPORTANT
Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system
controllers, from the system before running the
connectivity software.
Table F-1: System Connectivity
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
– Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.
Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.
Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select by pressing the cursor control knob.
In the Choices selection box, select Card.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select by pressing the cursor control knob.
In the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it.
The software will prompt you through the connectivity setup.
When the test is complete, position the cursor on STOP TEST and select it; OR press the [K5]
pushbutton.
To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.
F-2
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Test Equipment Setup – continued
Manual Cable Calibration
using HP8921 with HP PCS
Interface (HP83236)
Perform the procedure in Table F-2 to calibrate the test equipment using
the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with the
HP83236 PCS Interface.
NOTE
This calibration method must be executed with great care.
Some losses are measured close to the minimum limit of
the power meter sensor (–30 dBm).
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
 Test equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable
calibration.
 Test equipment has been selected and calibrated.
Refer to Figure F-1 for location of the components on the PCS Interface
and Communications Test Set.
Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
NOTE
Verify that GPIB controller is turned off.
Insert HP 83236A Manual Control System card into memory card slot (see Figure F-1).
Press the Preset pushbutton.
Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
CARD.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
MANUAL.
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.
If using HP 83236A:
Set channel number=:
– Position cursor at Channel
Number and select it.
– Enter the chan# using the numeric
keypad; press [Enter] and the
screen will go blank.
– When the screen reappears, the
chan# will be displayed on the
channel number line.
Mar 2001
If using HP 83236B:
Set channel frequency:
– Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.
– Select User Defined Frequency.
– Go Back to Previous Menu.
– Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency and
enter actual RX frequency.
– Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency and
enter actual TX frequency.
. . . continued on next page
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
F-3
DRAFT
Test Equipment Setup
– continued
Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
Set RF Generator level:
– Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.
– Enter –10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.
– When the screen reappears, the value –10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.
Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:
– Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it
– Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.
– Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
10
Select Back to Previous Menu.
11
Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:
Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:
– Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.
– Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.
– Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level
(1850 – 1910 MHz for 1.9 GHz or 1750 – 1780 for 1.7 GHz).
– Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.
12
Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
13
Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
14
On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.
15
Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.
16
Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.
NOTE
The Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitude
by adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.
17
Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dB
should be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meter
before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
18
Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting each
component, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor (see Figure F-1,
Setups A, B, or C). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.
 Example:
(A) Test Cable(s)
(B) 20 dB Attenuator =
(B) Directional Coupler =
–1.4 dB
–20.1 dB
–29.8 dB
. . . continued on next page
F-4
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Test Equipment Setup – continued
Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
19
After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total test
setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
 Example:
Total test setup loss = –1.4 –29.8 –20.1 = –51.3 dB.
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20
Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
21
Select Continue (K2).
22
Select RF Generator Level and set to –119 dBm.
23
Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
24
Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fields
not indicated remain at default):
 Verify the GPIB (HP–IB) address:
–
–
–
–
under To Screen, select More
select IO CONFIG
Set HP–IB Adrs to 18
set Mode to Talk&Lstn
 Verify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)
– Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches to
the CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.
– Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq
25
Refer to Table 3-29 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
F-5
DRAFT
Test Equipment Setup
– continued
Figure F-1: Calibrating Test Setup Components
MEMORY
CARD
SLOT
POWER
SENSOR
(A)
(A)
POWER
SENSOR
(B)
(B)
20 dB / 20 WATT
ATTENUATOR
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
150 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
F-6
30 dB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
FW00292
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Test Equipment Setup – continued
HP PCS Interface Test Equipment
Setup for Manual Testing
Follow the procedure in Table F-3 to setup the HP PCS Interface Box for
manual testing.
Table F-3: HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing
 Step
Action
NOTE
Verify GPIB controller is turned off.
Insert HP83236B Manual Control/System card into the memory card slot.
Under Screen Controls, press the [TESTS] push-button to display the TESTS (Main Menu)
screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select. In the Choices selection box, select
CARD.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select. In the Choices selection box, select
MANUAL.
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select OR press the K1 push-button.
Set channel number=:
– Position cursor at Channel Number and select.
– Enter the chan# using the numeric keypad and then press [Enter] (the screen will blank).
– When the screen reappears, the chan# will be displayed on the channel number line.
* IMPORTANT
If using a TMPC with Tower Top Amplifier (TTA) skip Step 7.
 Set RF Generator level= –119 dBm + Cal factor
Example: –119 dBm + 2 dB = –117 dBm
 Continue with Step 9 (skip Step 8).
Set RF Generator level= –116 dBm + Cal factor.
Example: –116 dBm + 2 dB = –114 dBm
Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dB:
– Position cursor at RF Generator Level and select.
– Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select.
– Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
10
Select Back to Previous Menu.
11
Select Quit, then select Yes.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
F-7
DRAFT
Test Equipment Setup
– continued
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
using Advantest R3465
NOTE
Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.
Perform the procedure in Table F-4 to calibrate the test cable setup using
the Advantest R3465. Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup and
calibration must be performed at both the TX and RX frequencies.
Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
– This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and
stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display
Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.
Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key
Select the Setup CRT menu key
Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters
NOTE
Fields not listed remain at default
Generator Mode: SIGNAL
Link: FORWARD
Level Unit: dBm
CalCorrection: ON
Level Offset: OFF
Select the return CRT menu key
Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys
Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
10
Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle it
OFF.
11
Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.
12
Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.
13
Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561L
CDMA Test Source Unit.
14
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.
. . . continued on next page
F-8
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Test Equipment Setup – continued
Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step
Action
15
Record the power meter reading ________________________
16
Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.
* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dB
should be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before
connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
17
Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect each
component one–at–a–time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-2, “Setups
A, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection.
Example:
(A) 1st Test Cable
= –0.5 dB
(B) 2nd Test Cable
= –1.4 dB
(C) 20 dB Attenuator
= –20.1 dB
(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler
= –29.8 dB
18
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.
19
Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
Example:
Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dB
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20
Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area
21
Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency
22
Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.
23
Refer to Table 3-29 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
F-9
DRAFT
Test Equipment Setup
– continued
Figure F-2: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465
RF OUT
POWER
SENSOR
(A) & (B)
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
20 DB / 2 WATT
ATTENUATOR
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(D)
100 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
F-10
FW00320
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Appendix G: VSWR
Appendix Content
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Setup – HP Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Setup – Advantest Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-1
G-1
G-1
G-2
G-4
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
Purpose
The following procedures will verify that the Voltage Standing Wave
Ratio (VSWR) of all antennas and associated feed lines fall within
acceptable limits. The tests will be performed on all antennas in a
sequential manner (i.e., ANT 1, then ANT 2) until all antennas/feedlines
have been verified.
These procedures should be performed periodically by measuring each
respective antenna’s VSWR (reflected power) to verify that the antenna
system is within acceptable limits. This will ensure continued peak
system performance.
The antenna VSWR will be calculated at the CDMA carrier frequency
assigned to each antenna. Record and verify that they meet the test
specification of less than or equal to 1.5:1.
IMPORTANT
It is recommended that the installer be familiar with the
following procedure in its entirety before beginning the
actual procedure. Ensure that the entire site is currently not
in service.
NOTE
This test is used to test RX antennas by substituting RX
frequencies for TX frequencies.
Study the site engineering documents and perform the following tests
only after first verifying that the RF cabling configuration required to
interconnect the BTS frames and antennas meet requirements called out
in the BTS Installation Manual.
Test equipment
The following pieces of test equipment will be required to perform this
test:
 LMF
 Directional coupler
 Communications test set
WARNING
Prior to performing antenna tests, insure that no CDMA
BBX channels are keyed. Failure to do so could result in
personal injury or serious equipment damage.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
G-1
DRAFT
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
– continued
Equipment Setup – HP Test
Set
Follow the steps in Table G-1 to set up test equipment required to
measure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.
Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure – HP Test Set
Step
HP TEST SET
Action
If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-2 on page 3-5 to set up test
equipment & interface the LMF computer to the BTS.
For manual VSWR testing, using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-1 (1700/1900 MHz)
or Figure G-2 (800 MHz).
– Connect the communications test set RF OUT ONLY port to the INPUT port of the directional
coupler.
– Connect the RF IN/OUT port of the communication test set to the reverse (RVS) port on the
directional coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 ohm load.
– Install the antenna feed line to the output port on the directional coupler.
NOTE
Manual Communications Analyzer test setup (fields not indicated remain at default):
 Set screen to RF GEN.
– For 1900 MHz systems, set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier
between 1930–1990 MHz for TX and 1850–1910 MHz for RX. For 800 MHz systems, set the
RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between 869–894 MHz for TX and
824–849 MHz for RX. For 1700 MHz systems, set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency of
actual CDMA carrier between 1840–1870 MHz for TX and 1750–1780 MHz for RX.
– Set Amplitude to –30 dBm.
– Set Output Port to RF OUT.
– Set AFGen1 & AFGen2 to OFF.
Remove the antenna feed line and install an “RF short” onto the directional coupler output port.
NOTE
Set–up communication test set as follows (fields not indicated remain at default):
 Set screen to SPEC ANL.
–
–
–
–
G-2
Under Controls, set input port to ANT.
Set Ref Level to –40 dBm.
Under Controls, select Main, select Auxiliary.
Under Controls, select AVG. Set Avg = 20.
– Record the reference level on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.
– Replace the short with the antenna feedline. Record the reference level on the communications
analyzer and Note for as PA reference.
– Record the difference of the two readings in dB.
. . . continued on next page
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued
Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure – HP Test Set
Step
HP TEST SET
Action
Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.
Where:
RL(dB) = PA(dBm) – PS(dBm)
PA = Power reflected from antenna
PS = Power reflected from short
A calculated value of –13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.
ȡ1 ) 10
VSWR +ȧ
Ȣ 1 – 10
ȣ
ȧ
Ȥ
RL
20
RL
20
If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including any
in–line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,
consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacement
information.
Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.
Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas.
Figure G-1: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (1700/1900 MHz)
RF
IN/OUT
PORT
RF OUT
ONLY
PORT
FEED LINE TO
ANTENNA
UNDER TEST
RF SHORT
OUTPUT
PORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RVS
(REFLECTED)
PORT
INPUT
PORT
FWD (INCIDENT)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATED LOAD
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
FW00342
G-3
DRAFT
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
– continued
Figure G-2: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (800 MHz)
FEED LINE TO
ANTENNA
UNDER TEST
RF
SHORT
RVS
(REFLECTED)
PORT
INPUT
PORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
OUTPUT
PORT
FWD (INCIDENT)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATED LOAD
FW00343
Equipment Setup – Advantest
Test Set
Follow the steps in Table G-2 to set up test equipment required to
measure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.
Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set
Step
ADVANTEST
Action
If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-2 on page 3-5 to set up test
equipment and interface the LMF computer to the BTS.
For manual VSWR testing using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-3.
– Connect the communications test set RF OUT port to the input port of the directional coupler.
– Connect the INPUT port of the communication test set to the forward port on the directional
coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 Ohm load.
– Connect the RF short to the directional coupler output port.
. . . continued on next page
G-4
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued
Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set
Step
Action
ADVANTEST
Preform the following to instruct the calibrated test set to generate a CDMA RF carrier (RVL call)
with all zero longcode at the assigned RX frequency at –10 dBm:
 Push the ADVANCE Measurement key.
 Push the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.
 Push the FREQ Entry key:
– For 1900 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between
1930–1990 MHz for TX and 1850–1910 MHz for RX.
– For 800 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between
869–894 MHz for TX and 824–849 MHz for RX.
– For 1700 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between
1840–1870 MHz for TX and 1750–1780 MHz for RX.
Push the LEVEL Entry key; set to 0 dBm (by entering 0 and pushing the –dBm key).
Verify that ON is active in the Output CRT menu key.
Verify that OFF is active in the Mod CRT menu key.
Push the CW Measurement key.
Push the FREQ Entry key.
– Push the more 1/2 CRT menu key.
– Set Preselect CRT menu key to 3.0G.
 Push the Transient Measurement key.
– Push the Tx Power CRT menu key.
– Push the LEVEL entry key (set to 7 dBm by entering 7 and pushing the the dBm key).
– Set Avg Times CRT menu key to ON. Set to 20 (by entering 20 and pushing the Hz ENTER
key).
 Push the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.
Record the Burst Power display on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.
Install the antenna feedline to the output port of the directional coupler.
 Push the Auto Level Set CRT menu key.
 Push the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.
Record the Burst Power on the communications analyzer and Note as PA level for reference.
Record the difference of the two readings in dBm.
Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.
Where:
RL(dB) = PA(dBm) – PS(dBm)
PA = Power reflected from antenna
PS = Power reflected from short
A calculated value of –13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.
ȡ1 ) 10 ȣ
VSWR +ȧ
ȧ
–
10
Ȣ
Ȥ
RL
20
RL
20
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
G-5
DRAFT
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
– continued
Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set
Step
ADVANTEST
Action
If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including any
in–line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,
consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacement
information.
10
Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.
11
Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas.
Figure G-3: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using Advantest R3465
RF OUT
FEED LINE TO
ANTENNA
UNDER TEST
RF IN
RF
SHORT
RVS
(REFLECTED)
PORT
OUTPUT
PORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
FWD (INCIDENT)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATED LOAD
G-6
INPUT
PORT
FW00332
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Appendix H: Download ROM Code
Appendix Content
Download ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-1
H-1
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Download ROM Code
Download ROM Code
ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being downloaded changes to
OOS_ROM (blue) and remains OOS_ROM (blue). The same R–level
RAM code must then be downloaded to the device. This procedure
includes steps for both the ROM code download and the RAM code
download.
ROM code files cannot be selected automatically. The ROM code file
must be selected manually. Follow the procedure in Table H-1 to
download ROM code.
Prerequisite
 ROM and RAM code files exist for the device to be downloaded.
CAUTION
The R–level of the ROM code to be downloaded must be
the same as the R–level of the ROM code for other devices
in the BTS. Code must not be mixed in a BTS. This
procedure should only be used to upgrade replacement
devices for a BTS and it should not be used to upgrade all
devices in a BTS. If a BTS is to be upgraded from one
R–level to another, the optimization and ATP procedures
must first be performed with the BTS in the original
configuration. The upgrade should then be done by the
CBSC.
Table H-1: Download ROM Code
Step
Action
NOTE
ROM code files cannot be selected automatically. The ROM code file must be selected manually.
Click on the device to be downloaded.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Status menu item.
A status report window appears.
Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.
Click on the OK button to dismiss the status report window.
Click on the Download Code Manual menu item.
A file selection window appears.
Double–click on the version folder that contains the desired ROM code file.
Double–click on the Code folder.
A list of ROM and RAM code files is displayed.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
H-1
DRAFT
Download ROM Code
– continued
Table H-1: Download ROM Code
Step
Action
! CAUTION
A ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type) needs to be chosen. The
hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4. Unpredictable results
can happen and the device may be damaged (may have to be replaced) if a ROM code file with wrong
binary type is downloaded.
10
11
Choose a ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type).
The hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4.
Click on the ROM code file that matches the device type and HW Bin Type (e.g., bbx_rom.bin.0604
for a BBX having a HW Bin Type of 0604).
The file should be highlighted.
12
Click on the Load button.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.
13
Click on the Util menu.
14
Select the Tools menu item.
15
Click on the Update NextLoad menu item.
16
Select the version number of the folder that was used for the ROM code download.
17
18
Click on the Save button.
A pop–up message indicates that the CDF file has been updated.
Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop–up message.
19
Click on the device that was downloaded with ROM code.
20
Click on the Device menu.
21
Click on the Download Code menu item to download RAM code.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Data is automatically downloaded to GLI devices when the RAM code is downloaded. Use the
Download Data procedure to download data to other device types after they have been upgraded.
22
Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.
The downloaded device should be OOS_RAM (yellow) unless it is a GLI in which case it should be
INS (green).
23
Click on the device that was downloaded.
24
Click on the Device menu.
25
Click on the Status menu item.
Verify that the status report window displays the correct ROM and RAM version numbers.
Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.
26
H-2
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Appendix I: In–Service Calibration
Appendix Content
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-1
I-1
I-1
Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Delta Calibration Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8935 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-2
I-2
I-2
I-4
I-7
In–Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In–Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-10
I-10
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Mar 2001
Introduction
Purpose
This procedure is a guide to expanding your system with multiple
carriers while the system remains in service. This procedure also allows
you to perform on site maintenance (replace defective boards and
recalibrate) while the remainder of the site stays in service.
Motorola recommends that you perform this procedure during a
maintenance window.
This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 4–to–1 combiners.
The procedure can only be performed on one side of the BTS at one
time. That is, LPAs 1, 2 ,3, 7, 8, 9 (feed antennas 1, 2, 3) can be
calibrated while LPAs 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 (feed antennas 4, 5, 6) remain
in service and vice versa.
Equipment Warm up
IMPORTANT
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment
after it has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter)
has been replaced, re-calibration must be performed.
Failure to do so could introduce measurement errors,
causing incorrect measurements and degradation to system
performance.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
I-1
DRAFT
Power Delta Calibration
Power Delta Calibration
Introduction
The In–service calibration procedure has several differences from a
normal calibration procedure. One of these is the use of a spectrum
analyzer instead of a power meter to measure power. Power meters are
broadband measurement devices and cannot be used to measure power
during In–service Calibration since other carriers are operating. A
spectrum analyzer can be used because it measures power at a given
frequency. However, measuring power using a spectrum analyzer is less
accurate than using a power meter. Therefore, you must compensate for
the difference (delta) between the power meter and the spectrum
analyzer.
HP8921A Power Delta
Calibration
Use the HP8921A Spectrum Analyzer to measure power during
In–Service Calibration for 800 MHz systems. After the offset value has
been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value.
Follow the procedure in Table I-1 to perform the HP8921A Power Delta
Calibration procedure.
NOTE
This procedure requires two HP8921As.
Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
Connect a short RF cable between the HP8921A Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see
Figure I-1).
Set the HP8921A signal source as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Generator
– Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency
– CW RF Path to IQ
– Output Port to Dupl
– Data Source to Random
– Amplitude to 0 dBm
Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
. . . continued on next page
I-2
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Turn off the source HP8921A signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP8921A for convenience in the following steps.
Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8921A Duplex Out port and the measuring
HP8921A RF–IN port (see Figure I-2).
Ensure that the source HP8921A settings are the same as in Step 2.
Set the measuring HP8921A as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Anl
– Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency
– Input Attenuation to 0 dB
– Input port to RF–IN
– Gain to Auto
– Analyzer Direction to Fwd
Turn on the source HP8921A signal output.
10
Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8921A as result
B ________________________.
11
Turn off the source HP8921A signal output and disconnect the equipment.
12
Compute the delta between HP437B and HP8921A using the following formula:
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table I-4).
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
I-3
DRAFT
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Figure I-1: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP437B
HP 8921A
HP437B
SENSOR
Power
Sensor
DUPLEX
OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00801
Figure I-2: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP8921A
Measurement HP8921A
Source HP8921A
DUPLEX
OUT
RF
IN/OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00802
Advantest R3465 Power Delta
Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table I-2 to perform the Advantest 3465 Power
Delta Calibration procedure.
Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
On the Advantest R3465:
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the CRT display.
Press the ADVANCE key in the Measurement area of the control panel.
Press the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.
Press the FREQ key in the Entry area of the control panel.
. . . continued on next page
I-4
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.
Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the keypad entry keys.
Verify the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
Verify the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Output key to toggle it OFF.
On the HP 437 Power Meter:
10
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.
* IMPORTANT
For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the
component being calibrated.
11
Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the power sensor,
refer to Figure I-3.
12
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to ON.
13
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
14
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to OFF.
15
Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the Spectrum
Analyzer INPUT Port, refer to Figure I-4.
16
Press the Output CRT menu key to change the Output to ON.
17
Press the CW key in the Measurement area of the control panel.
18
Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.
19
Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad entry keys.
20
Press the dB/div CRT menu key.
21
Press the 10 dB/div CRT menu key.
22
Press the FREQ key in Entry area of the control panel.
23
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
24
Press the more 1/2 CRT menu key.
25
Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.0G.
26
Press the FORMAT key in the Display Control area of the control panel.
27
Press the TRACE CRT menu key.
28
Press the AVG A CRT menu key.
29
Set AVG to 20 using keypad entry keys.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
I-5
DRAFT
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
30
Press the return CRT menu key.
31
Press the SPAN key in the Entry area of the control panel.
32
Press the Zero Span CRT menu key.
33
Press the BW key in the Entry area of the control panel.
34
Press the RBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL. using keypad entry keys enter 30 kHz.
35
Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad entry keys.
36
Press the VBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.
37
Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad entry keys.
38
Press the Marker ON key in the Display Control area of the control panel.
39
Record the Marker Level reading as result B ________________________.
40
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Advantest measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table I-4).
Figure I-3: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to HP437B
Advantest
R3561L
RF OUT
Power
Sensor
HP437B
Short RF Cable
SENSOR
FW00803
I-6
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Figure I-4: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to R3465
RF OUT
R3561L
Short RF Cable
R3465
INPUT
FW00804
HP8935 Power Delta
Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table I-3 to perform the HP8935 Power Delta
Calibration procedure.
Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
Connect a short RF cable between the HP8935 Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see
Figure I-5).
Set the HP8935 signal source as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Gen
– Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency
– CW RF Path to IQ
– Output Port to Dupl
– Data Source to Random
– Amplitude to 0 dBm
Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
Turn off the source HP8935 signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP8935 for convenience in the following steps.
Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8935 Duplex Out port and the RF–IN/OUT port
(see Figure I-6).
Ensure that the source HP8935 settings are the same as in Step 2.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
I-7
DRAFT
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Set the measuring HP8935 as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Anl
– Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency
– Input Attenuation to 0 dB
– Input port to RF–IN
– Gain to Auto
– Anl Dir to Fwd
Turn on the source HP8935 signal output.
10
Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate.
11
Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8935 as result
B ________________________.
12
Turn off the source HP8935 signal output and disconnect the equipment.
13
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Advantest measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table I-4).
Figure I-5: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8935 to HP437B
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
HP437B
SENSOR
Power
Sensor
DUPLEX OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00805
I-8
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Figure I-6: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8935 to HP8935
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
DUPLEX OUT
RF IN/OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00806
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
I-9
DRAFT
In–Service Calibration
In–Service Calibration
IMPORTANT
This feature does NOT have fault tolerance at this time.
The system has no safe–guards to stop you from doing
something that will take the BTS out of service. If
possible, perform this procedure during a maintenance
window.
Follow the procedures in this section precisely, otherwise
the entire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE.
At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansion
hardware when it is in the OOS_MANUAL state.
The operator must be trained in the LMF operation prior to
performing this procedure.
Prerequisites
 Expansion hardware has been added in the CBSC database, and the
CDF file has been generated.
 The expansion devices have been inserted into the C–CCP cage and
are in the OOS_MANUAL state at the CBSC.
 The site specific cdf (with the expansion hardware) and cal files have
been loaded onto the LMF.
 The LMF has the same code and dds files as the CBSC to download.
IMPORTANT
Do not download code or data to any cards other than those
you are working on. Downloading code or data to other
cards will take the site OUT OF SERVICE.
The code file version numbers must match the version
numbers on the other cards in the frame. If the numbers do
not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.
The BTS–#.cdf, CBSC–#.cdf, and CAL files for this BTS
must have come from the CBSC.
 Test equipment has been configured per Figure I-7 or Figure I-8.
 An RFDS (or at a minimum a directional coupler), whose loss is
already known, must be in line to perform the in–service calibration.
 Test equipment has been calibrated after 1 hour warm up.
 A short RF cable and two BNC–N adapters are available to perform
Cable Calibration.
. . . continued on next page
I-10
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
In–Service Calibration – continued
 The Power Delta Calibration has been performed (see Table I-1,
Table I-2, or Table I-3).
Figure I-7: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional Coupler
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
DUPLEX OUT
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
RX
TEST
CABLE
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
ANTENNA
OUT
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
ANTENNA
EXT
REF
IN
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
TX
TEST
CABLE
RF IN/OUT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER WITH
UNUSED PORT
TERMINATED
RX
TEST
CABLE
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
BTS
FREQ
MONITOR
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
GPIB ADRS
CSM
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00758
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
I-11
DRAFT
In–Service Calibration – continued
Figure I-8: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
RX
TEST
CABLE
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
DUPLEX OUT
ANTENNA
TX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
OUT
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
RFDS
DUPLEXER
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RF IN/OUT
RX
TEST
CABLE
EXT
REF
IN
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
FWD
COUPLED
PORT
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
BTS
FREQ
MONITOR
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
GPIB ADRS
CSM
LAN
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00759
I-12
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
In–Service Calibration – continued
Follow the procedure in Table I-4 to perform the In–Service Calibration.
Table I-4: In–Service Calibration
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
Set up the LMF for In–Service Calibration:
– Start the LMF by double–clicking the LMF icon on the Windows desktop.
– Click Options>LMF Options from the menu bar at the login screen.
– Check only the applicable spectrum analyzer check box on the Test Equipment tab.
Ensure that the GPIB address is 18.
– Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected.
– Click the Apply button.
– Select the BTS Options tab in the LMF Option window.
– Check the In–Service Calibration check box.
– Click the Apply button.
– Click the Dismiss button to close the LMF Option window.
Login to the target BTS:
– Select the target BTS icon.
– Click the Login button at the login screen.
Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration function:
– Click Util>Cable Calibration from the menu bar at the main window.
– Set the desired channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL at the cable calibration pop up
window.
– Click the OK button to perform cable calibration.
– Follow the on–screen instructions to complete the cable loss measurement.
NOTE
– The measured value is input automatically to the cable loss file.
– To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss.
. . . continued on next page
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
I-13
DRAFT
In–Service Calibration – continued
Table I-4: In–Service Calibration
Step
Action
Add the spectrum analyzer power delta to the Cable Loss.
– To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss.
– Add the value computed in Table I-1, Table I-2, or Table I-3 to the TX Cable Loss.
NOTE
Be sure to include the sign of the value. The following examples are included to show the mathematics
and do not represent actual readings:
– Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20 dBm
– Example: 5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm
– Example: –5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = –5.10 dBm
– Example: –5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = –5.94 dBm
Input the Coupler Loss for the TX tests:
– Click Util>Edit>TX Coupler Loss from the menu bar at the main window.
– Input the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken at
the time of BTS installation.
– Click the Save button.
– Click the Dismiss button to close the window.
– To view the coupler loss file, click Util>Examine>TX Coupler Loss.
Input the Coupler Loss for the RX tests:
– Click Util>Edit>Cable Loss from the menu bar at the main window.
– Add the appropriate coupler loss to the cable loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the
information taken at the time of BTS installation and input this value in the Cable Loss field.
– Click the Save button.
– Click the Dismiss button to close the window.
– To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss.
Have the CBSC operator put the redundant BBX OOS_MANUAL.
! CAUTION
Be sure to download OOS devices only. Loading in–service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICE
and can result in dropped calls.
The code file version numbers must match the version numbers on the other cards in the frame. If the
numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.
NOTE
Be sure to include the redundant BBX in steps 8, 9, and 10.
. . . continued on next page
I-14
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
In–Service Calibration – continued
Table I-4: In–Service Calibration
Step
Action
Download code and data to the target devices:
– Click Util>Tools>Update NextLoad to set the code version that will be downloaded.
– Check the appropriate code version in the pop up window and click the Save button to close.
– Select the target BBX(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
– Click Device>Download Code to start downloading code.
– Select the target BBX(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
– Click Device>Download Data to start downloading data.
! CAUTION
Perform the All Cal/Audit procedure on OOS devices only.
Run the All Cal/Audit procedure:
– Select the target BBX(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
– Click Tests>All Cal/Audit from the menu bar at the main window.
– Select the target carrier and confirm the channel number in the pop up window.
– Leave the Verify BLO check box checked and click the OK button to start calibration.
– Follow the on–screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS antenna port, connect to the
directional coupler (fwd) port associated with the on screen prompt antenna port.
10
Save the result and download the BLO data to the target BBX(s):
– Click the Save Result button on the result screen.
The window closes automatically.
11
Logout from the BTS and close the LMF session:
– Click Select>Logout to close the BTS connection.
– Close the LMF window.
12
Restore the new “bts–*.cal” file to the CBSC.
13
Enable the target device(s) from the CBSC.
Mar 2001
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
I-15
DRAFT
In–Service Calibration – continued
Notes
I-16
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Index
Numbers
Ancillary Equipment Frame identification, 1-13
10BaseT/10Base2 Converter, 1-8
LMF to BTS connection, 3-5
Ancillary frame, when to optimize, C-1
1700 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-7
ATP, 4-1
Code Domain Power, 4-10
Frame Error Rate (FER), 4-12
generate report, 4-13
Pilot Time Offset, 4-9
Report, 4-13
Spectral Purity Transmit Mask, 4-6
test matrix/detailed optimization, C-2
Test Prerequisites, 4-2
Test Procedure, 4-3
testing options, 4-3
Waveform Quality (rho), 4-8
Antenna Map, 3-80
1700 MHz PCS Channels, E-6
1900 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-2
1900 MHz PCS Channels, E-1
2–way Splitter, 1-11
3C–PC–COMBO CBL, 1-8
800 MHz CDMA Channels, E-4
800 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure, 4-1
ACTIVE LED
GLI2, 6-23
MCC, 6-25
Advantest R3465, 3-43
Calibrating Test Cable, F-8
Bay Level Offset calibration failure, 6-6
Backplane DIP switch settings, 2-3
Alarm Connector Location/Pin Numbering SC
4850/4850E, 3-85
ALARM LED, GLI2, 6-23
BLO
Calibration, 3-63
Calibration Audit, 3-70
calibration data file, 3-65
Calibration Failure, 6-6
Download, 3-70
Alarm Monitor window, 3-84
Alarm Reporting Display, 3-84
All Cal/Audit Test, 3-72, 3-73
All RX, 4-1
All TX, 4-1
All TX/RX, 4-2
AMR, No control, 6-16
AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification, test data sheets,
A-17
Mar 2001
BBX
Connector, 6-14
gain set point vs BTS output considerations, D-1
No control in the shelf, 6-16
BTS
Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-14
LMF connection, 3-5
system software download, 3-3
test data sheets, redundancy/alarm tests, A-16
when to optimize, C-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Index-1
Index
– continued
BTS frame
DC Distribution Pre–test, 2-9
DC Power Pre–test, 2-7
initial power–up, 2-14
Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,
6-3
Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-2
Cannot download CODE to any device card, 6-4
Create CAL File, 3-74
Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-4
Cannot ENABLE device, 6-5
Cannot load BLO, 6-7
C–CCP Backplane, Troubleshooting, 6-13, 6-14
C–CCP Shelf, 1-19
Site Serial Number Check List, A-18
Cannot Log into cell–site, 6-2
Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-9
Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Power
measurement, 6-9
Cable
GPIB, 1-9
LAN Cable, 1-10
Calibrating, 3-45, 3-56, 3-57
Null Modem, 3-34
Setting Loss Values, 3-61
Timimg Reference, 1-9
Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offset
measurement, 6-8
Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-8
Carrier Measurement Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-9
Cable Calibration
HP8921 with HP PCS
Manual, F-3
CDF
site configuration, 3-2
site equipage verification, 3-3
site type and equipage data information, 2-1
CAL File, 3-74
CDF Files, Copy from CBSC, 3-8
Calculating Center Frequencies
1700 MHz, E-7
1900 MHz, E-2
800 MHz, E-4
CDI Alarm
with Alarms Test Box, 3-86
without Alarms Test Box, 3-89
Calibrating
Cables, 3-56
RX, 3-59
TX, 3-58
Test Equipment, 3-56
Cell Site
equipage verification, 2-1
preliminary operations, 2-1
types, 3-2
Calibrating Test Cable, Advantest R3465, F-8
Channel elements, No or missing, 6-17
Calibration
BLO, 3-63
Cable, 1-6
data file, BLO, 3-65
In–Service, I-13
RF Path, Test Equipment Setup, 3-67
RFDS, 3-82
Test Equipment, 1-6
TX Path, 3-64, 3-68
Channels
1700 MHz, E-6
1900 MHz, E-1
800 MHz, E-4
CDMA LMF, Product Description, 1-2
Cell Site Data File. See CDF
Test Cable Calibration, 1-6
Test Equipment Calibration, 1-6
Calibration Audit Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-7
Index-2
Checksum Failure, 6-11
CIO, Connectors, 6-14
CLI, 1-3, 3-19
Command Line Interface, 3-18
Format Conventions, 3-19
Logging Out, 3-23
Cobra RFDS
external housing, 1-33
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Index
– continued
RF connector panel detail, 1-33
DC Power Problems, 6-18
Code Domain Power, 4-5
ATP, 4-10
DC/DC Converter, LED Status Combinations, 6-20
Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement
Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-9
Digital Control Problems, C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-15
Code Domain Power Test, 4-10
Digital Multimeter, 1-9
Code Download Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-4
Directional Coupler, 1-10
Device Enable (INS) Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-5
Command Line Interface, 1-3, 3-19
Common power supply verification, 2-13
Communications Analyzer Communication Failure,
Troubleshooting, 6-3
Communications System Analyzer, 1-9
Advantest, 1-9
HP8921A/600, 1-9
CyberTest, 1-9
HP8935 Analyzer, 1-9
Download
BLO, 3-70
BTS, 3-25
BTS system software, 3-3
MGLI, 3-26
Non–MGLI2 Devices, 3-28
ROM Code, H-1
E1, isolate BTS from the E1 spans, 3-4
Copy CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC, 5-6
Enable
CSMs, 3-29
MCCs, 3-31
Redundant GLIs, 3-31
Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC, 5-7
Enabling Devices, 5-2
Connector Functionality, Backplane,
Troubleshooting, 6-13
Equipment setup, VSWR, HP Test Set, G-2
Copy CDF Files from CBSC, 3-8
Ethernet LAN
interconnect diagram, 3-14
Transceiver, 1-7
Copy Files to a Diskette, 5-6
Copy CAL files to the CBSC, 5-7
CSM
Clock Source, 3-28, 3-29
Enable, 3-29
frequency verification, 3-34
functions, 3-32
LEDs, 3-33
MMI terminal connection, illustration, 3-35
Reference Source Configuration Error, 6-11
Troubleshooting, 6-11, 6-12
CyberTest, 3-43
Data Download Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-4
Mar 2001
FER test, 4-12
Folder Structure Overview, 3-13
Frame Error Rate, 4-5
ATP, 4-12
FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-22
Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-10
DC Power Pre–test
+27 V BTS frame detail, 2-7
–48 V BTS frame detail, 2-9
BTS Frame, 2-5
RFDS, 2-11
RFDS detail, 2-11
Ethernet maintenance connector interface, illustration,
3-6
Frequency Spectrum
Korean PCS (1700 MHz), E-6
North American Cellular Telephone System (800
MHz), E-4
North American PCS (1900 MHz), E-1
Full Optimization, 4-2
Gain set point, BBX, D-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Index-3
Index
– continued
Generating an ATP Report, 4-13
General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-4
I and Q values, B-1
Gigatronics Power Meter, 3-43
In–Service Calibration, I-13
GLI. See Master (MGLI2) and Slave (SGLI2) Group
Line Interface
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminary
operations, 2-1
GLI2
Connector, 6-14
Ethernet Connections, 6-14
LED Status, 6-23
No Control through span line connection, 6-15
No Control via LMF, 6-15
Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-3
GPIB Cable, 1-9
GPS
Initialization/Verification, 3-36
receiver operation, test data sheets, A-5
satellite system, 3-30
Test Equipment Setup, 3-34
Initial power–up
BTS frame, 2-14
RFDS, 2-14
Initialization/Verification
GPS, 3-36
HSO, 3-42
LFR, 3-39
Intended reader profile, 1-12
Inter–frame cabling, when to optimize, C-2
IS–97 specification, B-1
ISB connectors, 6-13
GPS Bad RX Message Type, 6-11
Isolation, T1/E1 Span, 3-4
Graphical User Interface, 1-3, 3-18
Itasca Alarms Test Box, 1-11
GUI, 1-3, 3-18
Graphical User Interface, 3-18
Logging Out, 3-22
LAN
BTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-14
Tester, 1-11
LMF Hardware Requirements, 1-7
LAN Connectors, GLI2, 6-24
High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, 1-11
LED, CSM, 3-33
High Stability Oscillator, 3-33
LED Status, 6-20
BBX, 6-25
CSM, 6-21
DC/DC Converter, 6-20
GLI2, 6-23
LPA, 6-26
MCC, 6-25
High–impedance Conductive Wrist Strap, 1-10
HP 437B, 3-43
HP 83236 A, F-3
HP 83236A, F-2
HP 8921A, System Connectivity Test, F-2
LFR
Initialization / Verification, 3-39
receiver operation, test data sheets, A-6
HP 8935, 3-43
LFR/HSO, Test Equipment Setup, 3-34
HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual
Testing, F-7
Line Build Out parameters
configure, 5-4
verify, 5-3
HP 8921, 3-43
HP Test Set, VSWR, G-2
HSO, Initialization/Verification, 3-42
HyperTerminal Connection, Creating, 3-10
Index-4
LMF, 1-6, 3-7
Ethernet maintenance connector interface detail,
illustration, 3-6
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Index
– continued
Installation and Update Procedures, 3-7
Termination and Removal, 5-7
to BTS connection, 3-5
Multi–FER test Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-10
LMF Operation, 3-18
NAM, Valid Ranges, 3-79
LMF Removal, 5-6
No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-18
Loading Code, 3-25
No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specific
GLI2 BBX or Switch board, 6-19
Logging In to a BTS, 3-20
No GPS Reference Source, 6-11
Logging Out, 3-22
CLI, 3-23
GUI, 3-22
Non–MGLI2, Download, 3-28
Null Modem Cable, 3-34
Logical BTS, 1-13
Numbering, 1-14
Login
CLI, 3-22
GUI, 3-20
Online Help, 1-3
Login Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-2
Low Frequency Receiver, 3-33
Optimization
Process, 3-1
purpose, 1-4
When, 1-5
Optional Test Equipment, 1-10
frequency counter, 1-10
LPA, test data sheets
convergence, A-8
IM Reduction, A-7
Oscilloscope, 1-11
LPA Module LED, 6-26
LPAs, Site Serial Number Check List, A-19
PA Shelves, 1-20
path
RX, 1-4
TX, 1-4
Manual
layout, 1-1
overview, 1-2
PCMCIA, Ethernet adapter, LMF to BTS connection,
3-5
MASTER LED, GLI2, 6-23
Pilot Gain, 4-8, 4-9, 4-10, 4-12
MCC, Enable, 3-31
Pilot Offset Acceptance test, 4-9
MGLI2
board detail, MMI port connections, 5-4
Download, 3-26
Pilot Time Offset, 4-5, 4-9
Miscellaneous errors, Troubleshooting, 6-5
Ping, 3-14
MMI Connection, 3-24
PN Offset
programming information, B-1
usage, B-1
MMI Connector
CSM, 6-22
GLI2, 6-24
MCC, 6-25
PnMask, I and PnMask Q Values, B-2
Power Conversion Shelf (–48 V BTS Only), Site
Serial Number Check List, A-19
MMI equipment setup, 3-24
Model SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit, 1-9
Module status indicators, 6-20
Mar 2001
Pin/Signal Information for ARM A Cable, 3-90
Power Delta Calibration
Advantest, I-4
HP8921A, I-2
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Index-5
Index
– continued
HP8935, I-7
Power Supply Module Interface, 6-14
RFDS
Calibration, 3-82
DC Power Pre–test, 2-11
Description, 3-75
initial power–up, 2-14
Layout, 1-33
Parameter Settings, 3-76
Set Configuration Data, 3-81
Pre–power tests, test data sheets, A-3
rho, 4-5
Preliminary operations
cell Site types, 2-1
test data sheets, A-2
rho test, 4-8
Power Input, 6-13
Power Meter, 1-9
Power Meter Communication Failure,
Troubleshooting, 6-2
ROM Code, Download, H-1
RS–232 to GPIB Interface, 1-8
Prepare to Leave the Site
external test equipment removal, 5-1
LMF Removal, 5-6
re–connect BTS IFM connector, 5-8
re–connect BTS T1 spans, 5-8
Reestablish OMC–R control, 5-8
Verify T1/E1, 5-8
Pushbuttons and Connectors, GLI2, 6-24
PWR/ALM LED
BBX, 6-25
CSM, 6-21
DC/DC Converter, 6-20
generic, 6-20
MCC, 6-25
Rubidium Standard Timebase, 3-43
RX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-17
RX Acceptance Tests, Frame Error Rate, 4-5, 4-12
RX path, 1-4
Sector Configuration, 1-28
Set Antenna Map Data, 3-80
Set Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-4
Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-61
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-62
SGLI2, board detail, MMI port connections, 5-4
Shelf Configuration Switch, 2-3
RDM, 6-13
Signal Generator, 3-58, 3-59
Re–connect BTS IFM connector, 5-8
Site checklist, data sheets, A-2
Re–connect BTS T1 Spans, 5-8
Site equipage, CDF file, 3-2
Redundant GLIs, Enable, 3-31
Site I/O board, T1 span cable connection, 5-8
Reestablish OMC–R control, 5-8
Site Serial Number Check List, A-18
Reference Distribution Module, 6-13
Required documents, 1-12
RESET Pushbutton, GLI2, 6-24
Resetting BTS modules, 5-2
RF
Adapters, 1-10
Attenuators, 1-10
Load, 1-10
RF Path Calibration, 3-67
Index-6
Site, equipage verification, 3-3
Span Framing Format
configure, 5-4
verify, 5-3
Span I/O board
E1 span isolation, illustration, 3-5
T1 span isolation, illustration, 3-5
Span Line
connector , 6-13
T1/E1 Verification Equipment, 1-11
Span line traffic, No or missing, 6-16
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Index
– continued
Span Parameter Configuration
set, procedure, 5-4
verification, procedure, 5-3
Span Problems, no control link, 6-27
Test Equipment Setup, 3-43
GPS & LFR/HSO, 3-34
HP PCS Interface, F-7
RF path calibration, 3-67
SPANS LED, GLI2, 6-23
Test Matrix, C-4
ATP optimization, C-2
Spectral Purity Transmit Mask ATP, 4-6
Test Set, Calibration, 3-53
Spectral Purity TX Mask, 4-5
Timing Reference Cables, 1-9
Spectrum Analyzer, 1-11, 3-58, 3-59
Top Interconnect Plate, 1-19
Spectrum Analyzer , HP8594E, 3-43
Troubleshooting
BBX Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line
Traffic, 6-16
BLO Calibration Failure, 6-6
C–CCP Backplane, 6-13, 6-14
Calibration Audit Failure, 6-7
Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement
Failure, 6-9
Code Download Failure, 6-4
Communications Analyzer Communication Failure,
6-3
CSM Checklist, 6-11
Data Download Failure, 6-4
DC Power Problems, 6-18
Device Enable (INS) Failure, 6-5
Login Failure, 6-2
MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR,
6-16
MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over
Co–located GLI2, 6-15
Miscellaneous Failures, 6-5
Multi–FER Failure, 6-10
No BBX Control in the Shelf – No Control over
Co–located GLI2s, 6-16
No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module,
6-19
No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module,
6-18
No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection,
6-15
No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-15
No MCC Channel Elements, 6-17
Power Meter Communication Failure, 6-2
Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure,
6-8
Span Problems, no control link, 6-27
TX and RX Signal Routing, 6-19
TX Mask Measurement Failure, 6-8
STATUS LED, GLI2, 6-23
SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-22
System Connectivity Test, HP8921A, F-2
T1
isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-4
span connection, 5-8
Test data sheets
AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification, A-17
BTS redundancy/alarm tests, A-16
general optimization checklist, A-4
GPS receiver operation, A-5
initial power tests, A-3
LFR receiver operation, A-6
LPA
convergence, A-8
IM Reduction, A-7
pre–power tests, A-3
preliminary operations, A-2
RX antenna VSWR, A-17
site checklist, A-2
TX antenna VSWR, A-16
TX BLO
Offset/Power Output Verification, A-9
Power Output Verification, A-14
Test Equipment
Automatically Selecting, 3-55
Calibrating, 3-56
Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-43
Manually Selecting, 3-54
Reference Chart, 3-44
Selecting, 3-54
verification data sheets, A-1
VSWR, G-1
Mar 2001
TSU NAM
Parameters, 3-78
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Index-7
Index
– continued
UTP, LMF to BTS connection, 3-5
Program, 3-83
TX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-16
TX & RX Path Calibration, 3-63
TX and RX Frequency vs Channel
1700 MHz, E-7
1900 MHz, E-2
800 MHz, E-4
Verification of Test Equipment, data sheets, A-1
TX and RX Signal Routing, C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-19
TX Mask test, 4-6
VSWR
Advantest Test Set, G-4
Calculation, G-3, G-5
Equation, G-3, G-5
manual test setup detail
Advantest illustration, G-6
HP illustration, G-3, G-4
required test equipment, G-1
transmit and receive antenna, G-1
TX Mask Verification, spectrum analyzer display,
illustration, 4-7
Verify Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-3
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. See VSWR
TX Audit Test, 3-71
TX BLO, test data sheets
Offset/Power Output Verification, A-9
Power Output Verification, A-14
TX Coupler, Setting Loss Value, 3-62
TX OUT connection, 4-2
Walsh channels, 4-10
TX Output Acceptance Tests
Code domain power, 4-5, 4-10
introduction, 4-5
Pilot Time Offset, 4-5, 4-9
Spectral purity TX mask, 4-5, 4-6
Waveform quality (rho), 4-5, 4-8
TX Path, calibration, 3-64
TX path, 1-4
audit, 3-71
calibration, 3-68
Warm–up, 1-6
Waveform Quality (rho), 4-5
Waveform Quality (rho) ATP, 4-8
When to optimize
Ancillary – table, C-1
BTS, C-1
inter–frame cabling, C-2
Updating LMF Files, 5-6
Index-8
Xircom Model PE3–10B2, LMF to BTS connection,
3-5
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Mar 2001
DRAFT
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Modify Date                     : 2001:08:23 14:16:37-04:00
Create Date                     : 2001:08:23 14:15:57-04:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Page Count                      : 252
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: IHET6BN1

Navigation menu